Home

User Manual Vol 3 - Guillevin Industrial Automation Group

1. CRP 811 00 Profibus DP Master Slave Bus address 1 Slot 7 Delete Parameters Delete Import Presettings Parameters Cut Copy Paste End Out Type Out Ref Out End d T Diag Ref Diag End Description UINT8 v 6 300013 300018 160 BOOL 000081 000160 170 AMM 090 00 4AI 2AO 4 DI 176 BOOL 000161000176 UINT8 v 6 300019 300024 UINT8 v 6 300025 300030 192 170 ADI 740 50 16DI 230V AC UINT8 v 6 300031 300036 208 BOOL 000177 000192 170 ARM 370 30 10DI 8DO 12 UINT8 v 6 300037 300042 464 BOOL w 000193 000448 170 ADM 540 80 Modbus Gate UINT8 v 6 300043 300048 480 170 ADI 340 00 1601 24 V DC w 4 gt OK Cancel Help Poll Note In the Slave range the Parameters command button is used for displaying slave parameters The slave modules are however parameterized in SyCon see SyCon software user manual 786 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Parameterizing To parameterize the master proceed as follows the Master Step Action 1 In the Master range select the Parameters command button Response The DP Master Parameters dialog is opened Dialog Representation DP Master Parameter Bus Address 1
2. Dialog display Local Atrium I O I O Station Drop Module Modules 2 ASCII Port No None w Input bits 480 Input bits 480 Output bitsO Parameter Output bits 32 Status table Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End 12000 Atrium Board CRP 660 00 300001 300030 400001400002 3 4 a v 4 OK Cancel Help Poll 808 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Set Module To set parameters for the INTERBUS master proceed in the following way in the Parameters Local Atrium Drop dialog Step Action 1 In the Slot column select line 2 Response The 2 text box has a dark background i e the CRP 660 00 module has been selected for editing Note Parameters are not set for CCO 12000 module 2 Select the Params command button Response The CRP 660 00 dialog is opened 3 Press the option buttons as shown in the following figure and exit the dialog using OK Note Help with setting parameters is obtained via the dialog s help text Dialog display CRP 660 00 Output timeout status Set to zero Retain previous value Addressing mode MSB left IBS MSB right 984 IBS Start behavior Compl config ne
3. RIDDV V IO S UI AI MB 1 Local Quantum drop 1 DIO master module DIO slave module DIO drop 2 A O N 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 755 Configuration examples Defining the To define the drop use Configure from the main menu and proceed as follows Drop Step Action 1 Select PLC Selection Response The PLC selection dialog is opened Select the Quantum PLC family and a CPU x113 xx Using OK return to the PLC Configuration window Select I O Map Response The I O Map dialog is opened and the first drop is automatically entered in the table Select the Head Setup command button Response The Head Setup dialog is opened Enter a 7 in NOM Slot 1 and quit the dialog using OK Response The NOM module NOM 2xx 00 is automatically inserted in the I O map in slot 7 of the selected drop In the Go to list box the network link Local RIO Slot is displayed Dialog display VO Map Reserve for 144 4 Insert Delete Go To Local RIO slot v Cut Copy Paste Drop iae Supervision in bits Outbits Status Edit Quantum I O 3 0 0 Edit insert at the end of the list select this line Remote 1 0 OK Cancel H
4. 792 Configuration of Peer 793 Global data transterit CURL on oes 795 Specific data 1 5 797 Compact 799 Editing Local le eee Boe e ey HERIDA E 799 Atrium Example INTERBUS 804 Introduction i toi muc byte et a RE LUI AR e iE poat 804 General Information a anuanua aaaea eaaa 805 INTERBUS Export Settings CMD 805 Editing Local Drop LR Beek cia mer Oi 806 Editing Remote Drop Importing INTERBUS Configuration 810 Momentum Example Remote I O 813 Introduction cres i RR Paes Wes E Re keds 813 General 814 Editing local Gropes ese ibm ee sta tie ate hate es Re Meee aes 814 Example 10 Editing Remote Drops I O 818 Momentum Example Ethernet Bus 821 Introduction s iu ee rece et be ioni ae RE sin Rae ico y 821 Configure 1 822 Network Configuration in Different Operating Systems 823 Editing local rop iia d ecran 833 Online Verbin
5. IEC standards IEC standards table for IL AWL language elements Table Property Property description number number 52 1 LD operator sets the current result to that of the operand 52 2 ST operator saves the current result to the operand address 52 3 S operator sets Boolean operands to 1 R operator sets Boolean operands to 0 52 4 AND operator 52 6 OR operator 52 7 XOR operator 52 8 ADD operator 52 9 SUB operator 52 10 MUL operator 52 11 DIV operator 52 12 GT operator Comparison gt 52 13 GE operator Comparison gt 52 14 EQ operator Comparison 52 15 NE operator Comparison lt gt 52 16 LE operator Comparison lt 52 17 LT operator Comparison lt 52 18 JMP operator Jump to tag Note 1 p 719 52 19 CAL operator Calls Function Block 52 21 Closing bracket Editing deferred operations 53 1 CAL operator with list of input parameters 53 2 CAL operator with loading saving of input parameters Note 1 Jumps are only allowed within sections not across section boundaries 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 719 IEC conformity Note 2 The following keywords are not available TYPE END_ TYP VAR INPUT END VAR VAR OUTPUT END VAR VAR IN OUT END VAR VAR EXTERNAL END VAR FUNCTION END FUNCTION FUNCTION BLOCK END FUNCTION BLOCK PROGRAM END PROGRAM STEP END STEP TRANSITION END TRANSITION ACTION END ACTION SEGMENT SCHEDULER RET amp 720
6. Dialog display Following module mapping and I O reference specification the dialog looks like this Local Quantum Drop Drop m Module Modules 7 ASCII Port No None w Input bits 0 mapas Input bits 176 2 Output bits 0 Params Output bits 96 Status table Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste Rack Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description 1 1 CPS 214 00 DC SUMMABLE PS 2 1 2 CPU x13 0x CPU 1xMB 1 3 DDI 353 00 100001 100032 DC IN 24V 4x8 1 4 DDO 353 00 000001 000032 DC OUT 24V 4x8 1 5 AVI 030 00 300001 300009 AN IN 8CH BIPOLAR 1 6 AVO 020 00 400001 400004 AN OUT 4CH VOLT CPR 93x 00 RIO Head S908 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 4 OK Cancel Help Poll Set module To set parameters for the individual modules proceed as follows in the Local parameters Quantum Drop dialog Step Action 1 From the Rack Slot column select the 1 3 line Response The 1 3 text box has a dark background i e the DDI 353 00 module has been selected for editing Note Parameters are not set for the CPS 214 00 and CPU x13 0x modules 2 Select the Params command button Response The 140 DDI 353 00 dialog is opened 3 Select the Discrete option button Response You return to the I O map 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example Note The modules are sometimes set with different parameters Help with this can be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog
7. 859 Installing the SA85 in Windows 98 2000 860 Installing the SA85 in Windows 863 Installing the Modbus Plus Driver in Windows 98 2000 865 Virtual MBX Driver for 16 bit application capability with Windows 98 2000 NT cette HI e 866 MBX Driver for connection between ModConnect Host interface adapters and 32 bit applications with Windows 98 2000 867 Remote MBX Driver for Remote 868 Ethernet MBX Driver for Modbus Plus Function via TCP IP 869 Establishing the hardware connection 871 Presettings when using Modbus for startup 873 Introduction zm DA tse dey DENS ated San BE a PE EV 873 Interface settings in Windows 98 2000 874 Interface Settings in Windows 876 Setting up the hardware 876 Transfer problems s ane shee ete eee ae Aa interes doen edet dde 877 Startup when using Modbus with the EXECLoader 879 Introd ctiom s pee bentes 879 Quantum first startup with 880 Compact first startup with 884 Momentum first startup for IEC with EXECLoader
8. 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 739 Configuration examples Editing Remote Editing of the I O st Drop defined second takes place in the dialog RIO Slot 7 Drop Quantum l O St 2 This dialog can be reached in two ways e Inthe I O Map dialog using the Edit command button or e in the Local Quantum Drop dialog using the Next command button Editing Remote Drop Introduction This section describes the configuration of the second remote drop The drop has already been defined in Editing the First local Drop See Editing local drop p 736 To edit the second remote drop the modules must be specified with their I O references before parameters for the individual modules can be set Quantum remote controller with RIO 2 3 D A CIDIDJAJA AJI ouo cuo lt Oc 2 Local Quantum drop 1 RIO master module RIO slave module RIO drop 2 N 740 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Mapping To allocate the modules and specify the address ranges use the dialog RIO slot 7 Modules and Quantum l O St 2 and proceed as follows Specifying I O Step Action References 1 Select the Module column Response The I O Module Selection dialog is opened 2 From the Category column select the lt all gt option Response All modules a
9. 888 Momentum first startup for LL984 with 893 Startup when using Modbus with DOS Loader 899 Introductions 2 cu er BE E Ie ee reu ud 899 Quantum first startup with DOS Loader 900 Compact first startup with DOS 903 Momentum first startup for IEC with DOS 906 Momentum first startup for LL984 with DOS Loader 909 VII Appendix N Appendix O Appendix P Appendix Q Glossary Index Startup when using Modbus Plus with the EXECLoader 913 IntrodUctlon ix acct ek te Sect edet Coe Be aet AR oa 913 Quantum first startup with 914 Compact first startup with EXECLoader 918 Atrium first startup with EXECLoader 922 Momentum first startup for IEC with 925 Momentum first startup for LL984 with 929 Startup when using Modbus Plus with DOS Loader 933 Introduction as te uet Dic eed Raed OE Ha ae o Mb eee ei 933 Quantum first startup with DOS 934 Compact first startup with DOS 937 Atrium first startup with DOS 9
10. second Manualt gt E 1 4 1 1 1 1 D D 5 ne lity ete ae 4 5 Bsp Bo 5 2 I3 7 s src s src otod Js src 0104 j 4 Step sets ACT1 ACT1 is mapped to I O but not read by any logic Has a delay time of 2 sec NOT CONNECTED Status bar 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 663 Windows interface Title bar A project s title bar shows the name of the active application i e Concept and the name of the project When coupled with a PLC the node address of the PLC is indicated in angled brackets lt gt If this PLC is on another network the routing path is also indicated If adocument window e g a section is enlarged to full screen i e the section takes up the entire application window the name of the document window e g the section name appears in the title bar Document windows which are not enlarged to full screen have their own title bar in which the name of the document window is indicated Menu Bar The menu bar of the application window contains various main menus The contents of the menu bar depend on the active document window Toolbar The toolbar consists of buttons which correspond to a menu command on the pull down menus The range and content of the toolbar depend on which window is active There are three different ways a button can be represented e grayed The comm
11. 710 IEC Conformity 711 IEC standards 712 Ata Glance so evum hid A tate ecb ee eee de 712 elements ores yea re E ae Ede 712 IL AWL language lt 719 ST language elements 721 Common graphic 722 LD language 1 723 Implementation dependent parameters 725 Errot CauSeS code E ERRARE we led een ea 728 Expansions of IEC 1131 3 2 0 0 cece eee 730 Text language syntax 20 ee mne 731 Configuration 733 Ata Glance so usse eR EEG RV ERR Ide dt CIE e ae 733 Quantum Example Remote Control with RIO 735 Introduction RECUPERA EUR ERU EG 735 Editing local drop oom ER RR EE eek ies 736 Editing Remote 740 Quantum Example Remote control with RIO series 800 743 Introductions 245 2248 oie SE tee ee ee a wed 743 Editing Local Drop i oie eset pee Caine Aree Foetal Pea eiae 744 Editing Remote 748 Quantum
12. Concept DFB X X X X Concept EFB X X X X Concept SIM X X X X 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 647 Performance Runtime System Different Performance Attributes Performance CPU type 258 512k 265 512k 275 512k 285 1M Concept PLCSIM32 X X X X Concept Security X X X X Concept EXECLoader X X X X Concept Converter Modsoft converter Concept ModConnect x available not available Runtime system Performance CPU type 258 512k 265 512k 275 512k 285 1M 16 bit CPU 32 bit CPU X X X X x available not available Availability of different performance attributes Performance CPU type 258 512k 265 512k 275 512k 285 1M Battery adapter required for backing up IEC programs Floating point processing Floating point emulation x available not available 648 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Performance Performance Attributes of Momentum IEC and LL984 Availability of IEC and LL984 support Support CPU type Performance 700 00 76000 76010 96020 96030 700 10 78010 98020
13. Maximum number of steps per SFC Limited by the available area for entering characters within the section number of sections per program organization unit only limited by Windows or PLC resources the upper limit for the total number of objects per SFC is 2000 Parameters Threshold values behavior 726 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 IEC conformity Parameters Threshold values behavior Maximum number of transitions per SFC and per step Limited by the available area for entering characters within the section number of sections per program organization unit only limited by Windows or PLC resources the upper limit for the total number of objects per SFC is 2000 Action control mechanism Functionally equivalent to the specification in the standard Maximum number of actions per step Only limited by Windows or PLC resources Graphical display of the step situation Green active Red inactive Transition switch time Of the magnitude of 10 ms Maximum width of branches connections Limited by the available area for entering characters 32 Contents of the RESOURCE libraries See EFB libraries amp help Maximum number of tasks 1 Task interval resolution not applicable Pre justified and non pre justified Schedules not applicable Maximum length of expressions Practically no limit Partial evaluation of Boolean expressions
14. 1 Double click on the My Computer icon Response All available objects are displayed Double click on the Control Panel icon Response All available objects are displayed Double click on the Connections icon Response The Connections dialog box is opened Select the connection to be set in the list box and click on the command button Settings Response The COMx Settings dialog box is opened Click on the command button Extended Response The Advanced Settings for COMx dialog box is opened Activate the check box FIFO activated Note Using the FIFO First In First Out buffer requires a serial port with 16550 compatible UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter Close all dialogs with OK Setting up the hardware connection Introduction Note Please refer to the Modbus Protocol Reference Guide for a detailed description of the hardware setup Procedure To establish the hardware connection do the following Step Action 1 Set a unique Modbus node address for the CPU using the rotary switch on the back of the module Note the Modbus node address set on the CPU s sliding cover Connect the Modbus interface CPU to the PC serial COM interface with a Modbus cable 876 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Presetting for Modbus Plus Transfer problems Introduction Communication errors can occur when loading the EXEC file C
15. At a Glance Introduction This chapter contains the Modsoft and 984 References What s in this This chapter contains the following topics 2 chapter Topic Page Modsoft Keys with Concept Equivalents 856 Modsoft Function Compatibility 858 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 855 Modsoft and 984 References Modsoft Keys with Concept Equivalents Keys Note When possible the Ctrl key is used in place of the Modsoft Alt key Table of keys Funtion Modsoft 2 x Key Concept Key Normally open contact Coil or same Normally closed contacts or same Horizontal short same Vertical short same Negative transitional contact Alt N N Positive transitional contact Alt P P Inserting a function block by name Alt F Ctrl F Copy element s Alt F3 Ctrl C Delete element s Alt F4 or Del Ctrl X or Del Paste Alt F5 Ctrl V Offset references Alt F6 Ctrl H Search Alt F7 F3 Search next Alt F8 F6 When online in direct mode Concept uses a nonmodal dialog with accelerators for Search previous and search next Network comments Alt C Ctrl M Goto network Alt G Ctrl G Insert network Ctrl I Append network Alt A Ctrl A Trace Alt T Ctrl T Retrace Alt B Ctrl B or Ctrl T Dx zoom Alt Z Ctrl D Goto node 1 1 of active network Home same Goto node 7 11 of active network End same Goto first network
16. OK Cancel Exit the dialog using OK 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 825 Configuration examples Network Declare this IP address in the operating system as follows configuration in E Ste Action Win NT P 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel Network Response The Network dialog box is opened Dialog display Network View Mode Identification Services Protocols Network Using the following information the computer is identified in the network p Computer Name SG POOL Domain SG OA Close Cancel 826 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Step Action 2 Select the register Protocols Dialog display Network View Mode Identification Services Protocols Network Card Network protocols Y TCP IP protocol Add Remove Properties Update Member of TCP IP stands for Transport Control Protocol Internet Protocol The standard protocol for long distance networks WANs Wide Area Networks which allow communication between different networks Close Cancel Select the network connection TCP IP Protocol 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 827 Configuration examples Step Action Select the Properti
17. Response The Concept directory is opened in a standard window Double click on the DAT directory Response All available BIN files are displayed Click on the BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired programming language See the table Loading Firmware for Momentum PLC Types p 951 Response The selected BIN file is displayed in File name text field Click on the command button Open Response You return to the dialog Operation and the path to the selected BIN file is displayed in the Filename text field Click on the command button Next Response The dialog File and Device Info is opened Information is provided here about the selected BIN file and also about the PLC Click on the command button Next Response The Summary dialog is opened This gives you an overview of the Settings made for you to check Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM Step Action 1 Click on the command button Transfer Response A message box appears warning you that all data available on the PLC will be lost and the configuration and program must be reloaded on the PLC Click on the command button Yes to continue the transfer Response The Progress dialog is opened This gives information about the progress of the transfer in a progress bar and text Click Close once the transfer is complete Response The dialog is clos
18. 0 400001 default AddrStyle 1 1 4 00001 separator AddrStyle 2 2 4 1 compact AddrStyle 3 3 QW00001 IEC Store variables in file Setting Description ExportVariables 1 After a project has been downloaded and saved all variables are stored in a file This file is called VAR and is found in the Project directory VAR VAR All variables and their attributes are shown in this file ExportVariables 0 Additional storage of variables in a file does not take place Determining the permissibility of digits in project names Setting Description ProjectPrefixDigit 1 Project names that begin with a digit are permitted ProjectPrefixDigit 0 Project names that begin with a digit are not permitted 956 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 CONCEPT INI INI Settings for Global DFBs Path Upload Defining the Path for Global DFBs and Help Files Path Defining the Storage of Global DFBs during Upload Defining paths Setting Description GlobalDFBPath Specify path for global DFBs HelpPath Specify paths for help files Defining a new directory for global DFBs Setting Description PreserveGlobalDFBs 1 During the upload process a GLB directory for the global DFBs is created in the project directory By doing this existing global DFBs in the Concept DFB d
19. 2 Click on the command button Next Response The Modbus Plus Target dialog is opened 3 Select from the list Devices Online the adapter address you set when installing the SA85 in the CONFIG SYS file Parameter n 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 925 Modbus Plus with EXECLoader Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus Plus protocol settings Step Action 1 Click on the command button Scan Response The nodes on the Modbus Plus network are read and displayed graphically in the left window A green point in the graphic indicates that the CPU is in RUN mode To stop the CPU continue as described in step 3 Double click on the read network node in the graphical display Response The Modbus address of the node is automatically entered in the textfeld In the text field Modbus Plus Address Click the right mouse button in the left window Response A context menu with individual PLC commands is opened If the Run display is lit on the CPU stop the program using the command Stop PLC Response A message window appears where you can click OK to confirm stopping the CPU Click the command button OK to confirm stopping the CPU Response You return to the Modbus Plus Target dialog and the green point disappears from the graph Activate the check box Bridge if the connection to the Modbus network node should be made via a Modbus network using a Mod
20. 3 Error message during analysis loading binding Return from function without assigned value not applicable Occurrence arrives at no outcome 4 Error message during execution The same identifier as connector tag and element name use not applicable Non initialized feedback variable initialized with system zero 1 Error not reported Identification for the handling of error causes according to IEC 1131 3 chapter 1 5 1 d e 1 Error not reported Error message during execution 2 Error message during programming 3 Error message during analysis loading binding 4 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 729 IEC conformity D 3 Expansions of IEC 1131 3 Expansions of IEC 1131 3 At a Glance The Concept programming environment makes the construct of the so called section available in all programming languages permitting the subdivision of a program organization unit This construct provides the opportunity to mix several languages in the body of a POU e g FBD sections SFC sections a property which if used for this purpose represents an expansion of the IEC syntax Sections do not generate their own name space the name space for all language elements is the POU Sections appearing in the body of a POU written only in the FBD language are not to be viewed as an expansion rather as a permitted means of specifying the execution sequences of several FBD networks furnished
21. Direct address None v ACTS Look up Variable declaration Authorize section None ACT5 Accept New Delete Up Down Mon times and delay time O SCFSTEP TIMES variable Literals Delay t 2S Maximum Minimum OK To selected Variable Cancel Help Text box Option button Command button 668 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Windows interface Command buttons Text boxes Lists One line lists Option buttons Command buttons are used to initiate actions immediately e g executing or aborting a command Command buttons include e g OK Abort and Help Command buttons followed by suspension points open a further dialog box A command button with a greater than sign gt gt extends the active dialog box The standard setting is identified by a dark margin This command button can be selected by pressing Enter To close a dialog box without executing a command select the command button Cancel Information text is entered into a text box If you enter an empty text box an insertion point appears in the far left of the box The entered text begins at this insertion point If text is already present within the respective box it will be selected and replaced by the new text automatically The text can however also be deleted by pressing Delete or Backspace In a list the available selection possibilities are listed If more possibilities are available than fit into the list the scrollbar or the arrow keys
22. Generating a project symbol At a Glance Generating a symbol for projects Once a project symbol has been generated a project can be immediately loaded on opening Concept In this way one or more program groups can be created which e g contain all the projects in a system allowing them to be started immediately Note A symbol can only be generated for an existing project Otherwise an error message appears on starting The procedure for generating a project symbol is as follows Step Action 1 Via Start Settings Taskbar open the dialog Taskbar Properties 2 In the register Start Menu Programs select the command button Add 3 In the dialog Create Shortcut select the command button Browse 4 In the dialog Browse move into the Concept installation path and double click on the file CONCEPT EXE Reaction The dialog Browse is closed and the file CONCEPT EXE with its path is entered in the text box Command line e g C CONCEPT CONCEPT EXE 5 Now add the project path and project name to the command line e g C CONCEPT CONCEPT EXE C PROJECTS PLANT1 PRu and confirm the details using Next gt 6 In the dialog Program group select an existing program group for the symbol or create a new one using New folder Confirm the change using the command button Next 7 In the dialog Select program designation select the project name and confirm using the command button
23. p 770 To edit the second remote drop the modules must be specified with their I O references before parameters for the individual modules can be set Note To link to the remote network the coupling module CRM 931 RG must be entered during module mapping Quantum SY MAX controller NE 5 PIPDIDIVIVIR RII OI 5 MIMM M 1 Local Quantum drop 1 2 RIO master module 3 SY MAX drop 2 774 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the Modules and RIO slot 7 SY MAX l O St 2 dialog Specifying I O Step Action References 1 Select the Module column Response The I O Module Selection dialog is opened 2 From the Category column select the lt all gt option Response All modules are listed in the Modules column 3 In the Modules column select the CRM 931 RG module Exit the dialog with OK Response The module is inserted in the I O map 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example see dialog representation RIO Slot 7 SY MAX Drop 2 5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns set the start references for the input and output modules Note Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 e g 100001 Coil References have the prefix 0 e g 000001 Input Registe
24. 1 5 j i 0 Contig Exter MM e ee ac Le ea ee D Sie me Data protectie T 1 1 1 Te 1 Peer Cop Hot Standby 3 s sFc o002 sso i S sFc_0302 Ethernet Sanz die ou ah SS SS SS ELS Profibus DP 4 1 iv Cii 1 1 4 TA i aran A ee weil be ENCORE G rails gta as 5 ssec cone i sscom s sre ova Dialog to be opened I ee uma ee pr ee ed ea depu 61 1 Dy 1 1 eese aei eu iem ee Ca o meer M thes ee nes 7 s sFc_oooa s src oio Ts src o104 1 li I 1 i I 1 E See due ut er ee E uus NL Y Step sets ACT1 1 is mapped to I O but no read by any logie a delay time of 2 sec NOT Document window PLC configuration section Application When Concept is started the application window is opened on your desktop The Window application window can be moved to any position on the desktop Alternatively it can be minimized to a button on the task bar A project can be opened or created in this application window The name of the project then appears in the title bar of the application window 662 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Windows interface Document After opening or creating a project you can open different document windows Window Docume
25. Connections between FFB outputs and inputs with the data type BOOL A data element which consists of one or more bits BOOL stands for the data type boolean The length of the data element is 1 bit occupies 1 byte in the memory The value range for the variables of this data type is 0 FALSE and 1 TRUE A bridge is a device which connects networks It enables communication between nodes on two networks Each network has its own token rotation sequence the token is not transmitted via the bridge BYTE stands for the data type bit sequence 8 Entries are made as base 2 literal base 8 literal or base 16 literal The length of the data element is 8 bits A numerical value range can not be assigned to this data type 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 963 Glossary Clipboard Coil Compact format 4 1 The clipboard is a temporary memory for cut or copied objects These objects can be entered in sections The contents of the clipboard are overwritten with each new cut or copy A coil is a LD element which transfers the status of the horizontal short on its left side unchanged to the horizontal short on its right side In doing this the status is saved in the relevant variable direct address The first digit the Reference is separated from the address that follows by a colon where the leading zeros are not specified Constants Constants are Unlocated variables which are allocated a value that cannot b
26. RTU ASCII mode is opened Use the command button COM Port Settings to open the dialog COM Properties Use the list field Connect using to select the programming cable interface on the PC default setting is COM Use the list field Bits per second to select the Baudrate default is 9600 Use the list field Parity to select the parity default is EVEN Use the list field Stop Bits to select the Stop bits default is 1 Ooj O0 Click on the command button OK Response The dialog is closed and you return to the dialog Modbus Target gt RTU ASCII Mode 894 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus with EXECLoader Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus protocol Step Action 1 Click on the command button Scan Response The nodes on the Modbus network are read and displayed graphically in the left window A green point in the graphic indicates that the CPU is in RUN mode To stop the CPU continue as described in step 3 Double click on the read network node in the graphical display Response The Modbus address of the node is automatically entered in the textfeld Modbus Address Click the right mouse button in the left window Response A context menu with individual PLC commands is opened If the Run display is lit on the CPU stop the program using the command Stop PLC Response A message window appears where you can
27. Response The PLC selection dialog is opened Select the Quantum PLC family and a CPU x113 xx Using OK return to the PLC Configuration window Select I O Map Response The I O Map dialog is opened and the first drop is automatically entered in the table Select the Head Setup command button Response The Head Setup dialog is opened Enter a 7 in RIO Slot and quit the dialog using OK Response The CRP 93x 00 module is automatically inserted in the component list in slot 7 of the selected drop In the Go To list box the Local RIO Slot 7 network link is displayed Select the last line in the table Select the Insert command button Response The second drop is entered in the Type column Note The number of drops to be inserted is defined in the segment scheduler dialog The default predetermines a maximum number of 32 Dialog display VO Map Reserve for 144 Insert Delete Go To RIO slot 4 v Cut Copy Paste Drop Type Super isioh in bits Outbits Status Quantum I O 3 0 0 Edit Quantum w 3 0 0 Edit To insert at the end of the list select this line N Remote I O OK Cancel Help Select the drop from the Drop column Select the Edit command button Response You reach the modu
28. Response The dialog Communication Protocol is opened Define SA85 Carry out the following steps to define the LAN address set in the CONFIG SYS file adapter Step Action 1 Select the option button Modbus Plus 2 Click on the command button Next Response The Modbus Plus Target dialog is opened 3 Select from the list Devices Online the adapter address you set when installing the SA85 in the CONFIG SYS file Parameter n 918 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus Plus with EXECLoader Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus Plus protocol settings Step Action 1 Click on the command button Scan Response The nodes on the Modbus Plus network are read and displayed graphically in the left window A green point in the graphic indicates that the CPU is in RUN mode To stop the CPU continue as described in step 3 Double click on the read network node in the graphical display Response The Modbus address of the node is automatically entered in the textfeld In the text field Modbus Plus Address Click the right mouse button in the left window Response A context menu with individual PLC commands is opened If the Run display is liton the CPU stop the program using the command Stop PLC Response A message window appears where you can click OK to confirm stopping the CPU Click the command button OK to confirm stopping the CPU Response You return to the Modbus Plus Targ
29. Run slow flashing COM ACT lit with some interruptions Modbus 3x flashes with interruptions After transfer the CPU display is as follows LED Response Run not lit COM ACT not lit Modbus 3x flashes with interruptions Note The three flash sequence Modbus display idicates that no communication is present on the bus This is displayed on Modbus by a non lit COM ACT display The COM ACT display is lit again once connection is made with Concept 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 911 Modbus with DOS Loader Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project p 43 software connection 912 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Startup when using Modbus Plus with the EXECLoader N Introduction Overview This chapter describes loading executive data EXEC onto the PLC with the EXECLoader What s in this This chapter contains the following topics chapter Topic Page Quantum first startup with EXECLoader 914 Compact first startup with EXECLoader 918 Atrium first startup with EXECLoader 922 Momentum first startup for IEC with EXECLoader 925 Momentum first startup for LL984 with EXECLoader 929 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 913 Modbus Plus with EXECLoader Quantum first startup with EXECLoader Introduction This section describes the first startup of Quantum when used with Modbus P
30. Step Action 1 Select the option File Selection Response The File Selection window is opened Click on the BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired programming language See the table Loading Firmware for Momentum PLC Types p 951 Confirm your selection with RETURN Response You return to the main menu 910 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus with DOS Loader Load EXEC file CPU display during transfer CPU display after transfer Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM Step Action 1 Select the option Load File To PLC Response The Loading Process window is opened and the warning The PROGRAM contents of the device being loaded could be lost after loading a new Executive The CONTENTS stored in the Micro H H P will always be lost after loading a new Executive Would you like to continue Y N N is displayed 2 Acknowledge the warning with Y Response The message Node failed to enter normal mode appears 3 The DOWNLOAD PROGRESS window appears which shows the transfer rate Response After the transfer is complete the message Download Operation Successful appears 4 Confirm the message with RETURN Response You return to the main menu 5 Select the Exit Program option Response The DOS Loader is exited During transfer the CPU display is as follows LED Response
31. Step Action 1 From the Rack Slot column select the 1 2 line Response The 1 2 text box has a dark background i e the DDI 353 00 module has been selected for editing 2 Select the Params command button Response The 140 DDI 353 00 dialog is opened 3 Select the Discrete option button Response You return to the I O map 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example Note The modules are sometimes set with different parameters Help with this can be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog 762 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples E 4 Quantum Example INTERBUS Control Introduction Overview What s in this section This Chapter contains the step by step process for the configuration of INTERBUS control with the Quantum This section contains the following topics Topic Page General Information 764 Editing Local Drop 765 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 763 Configuration examples General Information Introduction INTERBUS control using Quantum occurs via module NOA 61 1 10 During this process the module collects the words of all remote bus nodes and creates a telegram with status information and I O words The telegram is then transferred to the CPU so that the NOA behaves like an I O module Note Using branch interfaces in the remote bus remote bus branches with further
32. fast flashing Note The three flash sequence Modbus display idicates that no communication is present on the bus This is displayed on Modbus by a non lit Modbus display The Modbus display is lit again once connection is made with Concept Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project p 43 software connection 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 905 Modbus with DOS Loader Momentum first startup for IEC with DOS Loader Introduction Start DOS Loader Define Modbus This section describes the first startup of Momentum for IEC when used with Modbus The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections e Start DOS Loader p 906 Define Modbus interface p 906 Protocol settings p 907 Select EXEC file p 907 Load EXEC file p 907 The procedure for launching DOS Loaders is as follows Step Action 1 If the CPU display Run is lit stop the program with Concept in main menu Online Response The Run display is no longer lit the Ready is now lit 2 Open the directory DAT CONCEPT DAT Double click on the file LOADER EXE Response The installation program for the Executive file EXEC is started 4 Select the option Communication Parameters Response The dialog box Communication setup is opened 5 Select the Modbus option Response The Modbus communication setup window is opened Carry out the following steps to set the Modbu
33. ie DEDOS dM 681 Generalicombal o eds dineros ese epi 682 Icon bar in the 683 Icon bar in the SFC Editor ee eee 684 Icon bar in the LD 686 List of Symbols in the IL and ST 687 C 2 Appendix D D 1 D 2 D 3 D 4 Appendix E E 1 E 2 E 3 4 List of Symbols the LL984 Editor 688 Icons in PLC 689 Toolbar in the RDE 690 Short CUP KeyS sioe d Se tues EM bald ook 691 Ata Glance cbt ahs aed e RR PV Sebel dane bo aan Pane bed te 691 General Short Cut Keys 692 Short Cut Keys in the IL ST and Data Type Editor 693 Short Cut Keys in the and SFC Editor 695 Shortcut keys the LD Editor llle 699 Short Cut Keys in the LL984 Editor 705 IEG conformity 707 bee Eu RR CERA do RUN ERU e un 707 What is the IEC 1131 3 standard 709 ETT 709 General information about IEC conformity
34. no partial evaluation Maximum length of instructions Practically no limit Maximum number of CASE selections Practically no limit Value of the control variables on undefined completion of FOR loops Graphic semi graphic display Graphic Network topology restrictions no restrictions Evaluation sequence of feedback loops Within a network the starting point of the FFB execution sequence is determined by the single available feedback variable Means of specifying the network execution sequence 1 Execution sequence of program organization unit sections 2 The network execution sequence can be changed within sections this is done by using a menu command to switch between the execution sequences of two selected FFB items 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 727 IEC conformity Error causes IEC standards IEC standards table for error causes fable Error cause Handling see Note 1 p 729 Variable value exceeds the specified range not applicable Initialization list length and number of field 2 Error message during programming elements do not agree Incorrect use of directly displayed or external not applicable variables in functions Type conversion error 4 Error message during execution Numerical result exceeds the range for data 4 Error message during execution type Division by zero 4 Erro
35. s the big time consumer the scan times of the data provider and the data receiver 792 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Send directly But the sharing of global memory is just the first part of the full Peer Cop service Since the gobal memory architecture requires a setup or configuration for both communication partners there is another subservice to communicate directly with rather than Configure nodes This service is somewhat like a master to slave communication where the master knows what data to send and the slave expects data in a fixed layout and uses this data in a fixed manner like Terminal I O The limit of data that can be sent from the master to the slave is also 32 words This mode is not global data since it is sent from one node directly and explicitly to one other node The sender specifies this as specific output and the receiver as specific input this specification is hardwired on nonintelligent modules like Terminal I O The specific output and input words are also assigned to holding registers when a PLC makes use of this Peer Cop service Since both global and specific data transfer depend on scan time of the PLC s which provide and use this data in their logic there is no big performance difference with the transfer from one holding register to the other registers Configuration of Peer Cop Define Peer Cop Before configure a Peer Cop you must activate the check box Peer
36. CNF proceed as follows Step Action 1 Select in the main menu File Save PB Response The configuration is stored as a database file PB in the specified directory 2 Select in the main menu File Export gt ASCII Response The configuration is stored as an ASCII file CNF in the specified directory 3 Exit SyCon and start Concept The configuration must always be saved as a database file PB first only then can an ASCII file be generated from the saved PB file Every change must therefore also be saved as a PB file first before an ASCII file can be generated for export The files PB and CNF should always be saved in the same project directory After the Profibus DP nodes have been configured in SyCon the Profibus DP configuration is imported into the Concept I O map An example of configuration and import is described in the chapter Editing a Local Drop See Editing Local Drop p 780 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 779 Configuration examples Editing Local Drop Introduction This section describes the configuration of the first local drop For Profibus DP configuration the CRP 81 1 00 coupling module must be registered in the I O map The configuration defined in SyCon is loaded into Concept as the generated CNF file is imported into the parameter dialog of the CRP 811 00 coupling module Note For an error free transfer of the Profibus DP configuratio
37. Exit the window by clicking OK Response The changes are excepted by the system Several parameter settings must be made to enable Peer Cop communication via the SA85 adapter The Peer Cop function is deactivated as standard and should only be released if your application requires Peer Cop communication Torelease and set parameters for Peer Cop communication start with the first steps as with Edit SA85 Configuration In SA85 000 Adapter Properties select the register Peer Cop and make your settings 862 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Presettings for Modbus Plus Installing the SA85 in Windows NT Hardware configuration Installing Drivers SA85 configuration Carry out the following steps to set the SA85 hardware settings Step Action 1 Set the Modbus node address Modbus Plus Port Address and the memory based address on the SA85 see documentation IBM Host Based Devices 2 Install the SA85 as described in the IBM Host Based Devices documentation Install the Virtual MBX driver and then the MBX or Remote MBX driver Also see e Virtual MBX Driver for 16 bit application capability with Windows 98 2000 NT p 866 e MBX Driver for connection between ModConnect Host interface adapters and 32 bit applications with Windows 98 2000 NT p 867 e Remote MBX Driver for Remote Operation p 868 Carry out the following steps to configure the SA85 after installing the driv
38. In the Type column the Read Write type is entered Dialog display Map Reserve for 144 4 Insert Delete Go To DIO1 slot v Cut Copy Paste Drop Type EUN In bits Out bits Status Edit Read Write 3 0 0 Edit 70 insert at the of the list select this line Remote I O OK Cancel Help Select the drop from the Drop column Select the Edit command button Response You reach the module map 760 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges use the DIO 1 slot 7 Modules and Drop 1 dialog and proceed as follows Specifying I O Step Action References 1 Select the Module column Response The I O Module Selection dialog is opened 2 From the Category column select the lt all gt option Response All modules are listed in the Modules column 3 In the Modules column select the CRA 21x x0 module Exit the dialog with OK Response The module is inserted in the I O map 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example see dialog representation DIO slot 7 Quantum drop 1 5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns set the start references for the input and output modules
39. Note Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 e g 100001 Coil References have the prefix 0 e g 000001 Input Register References have the prefix 3 e g 300001 and Output Register References have the prefix 4 e g 400001 Response The end reference column In End or Out End of the available address range is automatically entered 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 761 Configuration examples Dialog display Following module mapping and I O reference specification the dialog looks like this RIO slot 7 Quantum Drop 2 Drop Module Modules 5 ASCII Port No None w Input bits 0 Params Input bits 176 Output bits 0 cher Output bits 96 Status table Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste Rack Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description 14 CRA 21x x0 DIO DROP MB 1 2 DDI 353 00 100033 100064 DC IN 24V 4x8 1 8 DDO 353 00 000033 000064 OUT 24V 4x8 1 4 AVI 030 00 300033 300041 AN IN 8CH BIPOLAR AVO 020 00 400033 400036 AN OUT 4CH VOLT 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 141 142 1 13 1 14 v 4 OK Cancel Help Poll Set module To set parameters for individual modules use the DIO 1 slot 7 Drop 1 dialog and parameters proceed as follows
40. Online Response The Run display is no longer lit the Ready is now lit Open the directory DAT CONCEPT DAT Double click on the file LOADER EXE Response The installation program for the Executive file EXEC is started Select the option Communication Parameters Response The dialog box Communication setup is opened Select the Modbusoption Response The Modbus communication setup window is opened Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus interface interf terface Step Action 1 Select the programming cable interface on the PC default setting is COM1 2 Select the Baudrate default is 9600 3 Select the parity default is EVEN 4 Select the Option button RTU 8 Bits for the RTU transfer mode Select the option ASCII 7 Bits for the ASCII transfer mode 5 Select the Stop bits default is 1 Note Data transfer can only take place if you have configured the same transfer mode ASCII or RTU on the CPU using a button on the front of the module 900 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus with DOS Loader Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus protocol Step Action 1 Enter in Enter PLC Address the node address set on the CPU using a rotary Switch on the back of the module Select the TARGET PATH 0 option Select the ACCEPT CHANGES option Response You return to the main menu
41. Peer Cop Expansion Size 100 4 Go To Link 0 CPU OLink 1 Head Slot 9 lt gt Link 2 Head Slot lt gt Health timeout msec 500 4 Last value 34 Global j Specific O Clear on timeout Input Input Hold on timeout Output Output OK Cancel Help 794 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Global data transfer Global Input For Global Input proceed as follows Step Action 1 For global data transfer open the dialog box Gobal Input by clicking the command button Input in the area Global Select node 10 in the list box of the left side of the dialog box Enter the Destination register the index the length and the Bin BCD Code in the text field of the dialog box as shown in the figure Representation of the dialog box Global Input 1 64 Range 400001 401872 1 32 1 32 7 Subfield Dest Ref Index Length Bin BCD 8 9 1 400040 1 1 BIN 10 2 11 12 3 13 4 14 15 5 16 v 6 7 Clear Subfields 8 OK Cancel Help Result The holding register 400040 gets the first word of global output data of node 10 therefore this is global input data for this PLC If the length value is higher lets say 2 register 400041 would get the second word of global output data of node 10 The
42. Step Action 1 From the Rack Slot column select line 1 3 Response The 1 3 text box has a dark background i e the DDI 353 00 module has been selected for editing Note The CPS 214 00 and CPU x13 0x modules are not parameterized 2 Select the Params command button Response The 140 DDI 353 00 dialog is opened 3 Select the Discrete option button Response You return to the I O map 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example Note The modules are sometimes parameterized differently Help with this can be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 783 Configuration examples Importing a Importing configured Profibus DP nodes occurs in the parameter dialog of the CRP Profibus DP 811 00 coupling module This dialog opens when you select the CRP 811 00 row Configuration from the I O map and press the Params command button Importing Profibus DP Configuration Introduction This section describes the import of the Profibus DP configuration After that further parameter settings for the master take place and the I O map can be established Downloading a To import proceed as follows Profibus Step Action Configuration to Concept 1 Select the Import command button Response The Select Import File standard window is opened 2 Enter the path of the previously generated CNF file and exit the dialog with OK Response Th
43. The CRP 93x 00 module is automatically inserted in the I O map in slot 7 of the selected drop In the Go To list box the Local RIO Slot 7 network link is displayed 5 Select the last line in the table Select the Insert command button Response The second drop is entered in the Type column Note The number of INTERBUS masters to be inserted is limited to two drops Dialog display Map Reserve for 144 4 Insert Delete Go To Local RIO y Cut Copy Paste Drop Type Supervision in bits Outbits Status Edit amp 1 Atrium 3 0 0 Edit Interbus S v 3 0 0 Edit To insert at the end of the list select this line OK Cancel Help 6 Select the drop from the Drop column Select the Edit command button Response You reach the module map 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 807 Configuration examples Setting In the Local Atrium Drop dialog the INTERBUS master CRP 660 00 is References automatically entered in the I O map For the specification of the I O references enter the start references in the In Ref and Out Ref columns After the start reference has been entered the end reference of the available address range of the module is automatically displayed Note Discrete input references have the prefix 1 e g 100001 coil references have the prefix 0 e g 000001 input register references have the prefix 3 e g 300001 and output register references have the prefix 4 e g 400001
44. available not available Runtime system CPU type Performance 121 01 2M 241 01 2M 241 01 S908 4M 16 bit CPU 32 bit CPU X available not available 656 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Performance Different Availability of different performance attributes Performance Attributes CPU type Performance 121 01 2M 241 01 2M 241 01 S908 4M Battery adapter required for backing up IEC programs Floating point processor Floating point emulation x available not available 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 657 Performance 658 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Windows interface At a Glance Overview The chapter describes the most important properties of Concept s Windows interface Further information can be found in the Microsoft Windows manuals What s in this This chapter contains the following Sections chapter Section Topic Page B 1 Window 661 B 2 Menu commands 666 B 3 Dialog boxes 668 B 4 Generating a project symbol 671 B 5 Online help 673 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 659 Windows interface 660 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Windows interface B 1 Window At a Glance Overview This section describes the types of windows and window elements in Windows What s in this This section contains the follow
45. in main menu Online Response The Run display is no longer lit the Ready is now lit Open the directory DAT CONCEPT DAT Double click on the file LOADER EXE Response The installation program for the Executive file EXEC is started 4 Select the option Communication Parameters Response The dialog box Communication setup is opened 5 Select the Modbus Plus option Response The Modbus Plus communication setup window is opened Define SA85 Carry out the following steps to define the LAN address set in the CONFIG SYS file adapter Step Action 1 Select the adapter address you set when installing the SA85 in the CONFIG SYS file Parameter n 2 Confirm your selection with RETURN 940 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus Plus with DOS Loader Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus Plus protocol settings Step Action 1 Enter in Enter First Routing Path the node address set on the CPU using a rotary switch on the back of the module Confirm the entry with RETURN Response The option Enter second Routing Path appears Acknowledge the option with RETURN Response The window for selecting the TARGET PATH appears Select the TARGET PATH 1 option Enter in Enter Software Interrupt gt the Interrupt 5c or 5d selected in the CONFIG SYS file Select the ACCEPT CHANGES option Response You retur
46. network supports this function If not contact your network administrator to get the correct IP settings Obtain IP address automatically r Use the following IP Addresses IP Address t Subnet mask s Standard gateway E Obtain DNS server address automatically r Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server S Alternative DNS server P Advanced OK Cancel Make the settings there Response The programming device is then registered for network operation with the IP address 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 831 Configuration examples Computer The information is used to identify the computer in the network Identification in Step ation Win 2000 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel System Response The System Properties window is opened 2 Select the register Network Identification Dialog display System Properties Network Identification Hardware User Profile Advanced The following information is used to identify the computers in the network Computer name sg4002 Domain SG ENG Click on the command button Network Identification to som a Network domain and to create a local user identification Click on Properties to change
47. 00 September 2001 747 Configuration examples Editing Remote Editing of the I O st Drop defined second takes place in the dialog RIO Slot 7 Drop Quantum l O St 2 This dialog can be reached in two ways e Inthe I O Map dialog using the Edit command button or e in the Local Quantum Drop dialog using the Next command button Editing Remote Drop Introduction This section describes the configuration of the second remote drop The drop has already been defined in Editing the First local Drop See Editing Local Drop p 744 To edit the second remote drop the modules must be specified with their I O references before parameters for the individual modules can be set Quantum remote controller with RIO Series 800 D 2 3 5 is C C D D A A C B PPDJD V VIR R DDV vio 88 suli O P A Oo 0 Ord t e Local Quantum drop 1 RIO master module RIO slave module RIO drop 2 Adapter module o0 A N RIO drop 3 with series 800 modules 748 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Mapping To allocate the modules and specify the address ranges use the dialog RIO slot 7 Modules and Quantum l O St 2 and proceed as follows Specifying I O Step Action References 1 Select the Module column Response The I O M
48. 02 May 2001 693 List of symbols and short cut keys Deleting text Marking text Deleting text Key Function Backspace Key Delete backwards Deleting a mark or deleting marked text to the left of the insertion mark Del Deleting a character or deleting marked text to the right of the insertion mark Ctrl Backspace key Delete backwards Deleting a line Marking text Key Extending the marking Shift Right to the next character Shift Left to the previous character Ctrl Shift Right to the next word Ctrl Shift Left to the previous word Shift Down to the next line Shift Up to the previous line Shift End to the end of the line Shift Home to the beginning of the line Shift Picture down to a window underneath Shift Picture up to a window above Ctrl Shift Picture down to the end of the current window Ctrl Shift Picture up to the beginning of the current window Ctrl Shift End to the end of the document Ctrl Shift Home to the beginning of the document 694 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 List of symbols and short cut keys Editing text Editing text Key Function Ctrl X Deleting marked text and saving in the clipboard Ctrl C Copying marked text and saving in the clipboard Entering the new text Replacing marked text Del Deleting marked text with
49. 1 Select PLC Selection Response The PLC Selection dialog is opened 2 Select the Compact PLC family and a PC E984 258 Using OK return to the PLC Configuration window 3 Select I O Map Response The I O Map dialog is opened and the first drop is automatically entered in the table Dialog Representation VO Map Reserve for 444 4 Insert Delete Go To Lokal RIO v Cut Copy Paste Drop isse Supervision in bits Outbits Status 2 1 Compact I O 3 0 0 Edit v Head setup OK Cancel Help 4 Select the drop from the Drop column Select the Edit command button Response You reach the module map 800 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the Local Modules and TSX Compact Drop dialog Specifying I O Step Action References 1 Select the Module column Response The I O Module Selection dialog is opened 2 From the Category column select the lt all gt option Response All modules are listed in the Modules column 3 In the Modules column select the MVB258A module Exit the dialog with OK Response The module is inserted in the I O map 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example see Dialog Representation Local TSX Compact Drop 5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns set the start references for the input and output modules Note Discrete Input References have th
50. 2 Click on the command button Browse Response The Concept directory is opened in a standard window 3 Double click on the DAT directory Response All available BIN files are displayed 4 Click on the BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired programming language See the table Loading Firmware for Atrium PLC Types p 952 Response The selected BIN file is displayed in File name text field 5 Click on the command button Open Response You return to the dialog Operation and the path to the selected BIN file is displayed in the Filename text field 6 Click on the command button Next Response The dialog File and Device Info is opened Information is provided here about the selected BIN file and also about the PLC 7 Click on the command button Next Response The Summary dialog is opened This gives you an overview of the settings made for you to check Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM Step Action 1 Click on the command button Transfer Response A message box appears warning you that all data available on the PLC will be lost and the configuration program must be reloaded on the PLC 2 Click on the command button Yes to continue the transfer Response The Progress dialog is opened This gives information about the progress of the transfer in a progress bar and text 3 Click Close once
51. 353 00 100033 100064 DC IN 24V 4x8 1 3 DDO 353 00 000033 000064 DC OUT 24V 4x8 1 4 AVI 030 00 300033 300041 AN IN 8CH BIPOLAR AVO 020 00 400033 400036 AN OUT 4CH VOLT 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 v 4 gt OK Cancel Help Poll Set module To set parameters for individual modules use the dialog RIO slot 7 Quantum parameters l O St 2 and proceed as follows Step Action 1 From the Rack Slot column select the 1 2 line Response The 1 2 text box has a dark background i e the DDI 353 00 module has been selected for editing Select the Params command button Response The 140 DDI 353 00 dialog is opened Select the Discrete option button Response You return to the I O map Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example Note The modules are sometimes set with different parameters Help with this can be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog 742 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples E 2 Quantum Example Remote control with RIO series 800 Introduction Overview What s in this section This Chapter contains the step by step process for the configuration of remote control with RIO Remote I O and series 800 modules This section contains the following topics Topic Page Editing Local Drop 744 Editing Remote Drop 748 Editing Remote Drop 751 840 USE 493 00
52. 512k 285 1M LL984 only IEC only Stripped Exec IEC and LL984 X X X X x available not available Availability of special performance attributes Performance CPU type 258 512k 265 512k 275 512k 285 1M LL984 Hot Standby IEC Hot Standby Interrupt processing with HLI LL984 only Split memory LL984 only with separate software Support for XMIT loadable LL984 only Support for XMIT EFB IEC only Support for XXMIT EFB IEC only Upload of the user program Support of Modbus function code 42 IEC only Password protection of connection structure with PLC PCMCIA support Flash memory for program and configuration Remote Terminal Unit RTU configuration extension 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 645 Performance CPU type Performance 258 512k 265 512k 275 512k 285 1M Profibus DP configuration extension Cyclical data exchange for configuration extension Code generation options x x Include diagnosis information Code generation options Xx x x Fastest code MMS Ethernet configuration extension ASCII Messages Peer Cop x x x RIO Remote I O DIO Distributed I O SYMAX
53. A dialog for selection the specific MDC file is opened 4 Set the correct path to the MDC file and select it e g SAMPLE MDC Confirm with OK Reaction The path including the name of the MDC file is now displayed in the Select Module dialog along with the defined modules 5 Select the module you want to add and click Add Module or in the case of multiple entries click on the Add All button You may additionally click the Browse button to return to the Open file dialog where you can select another MDC for evaluation 6 Click on the Close button to return to the main window Reaction The main window will now be displayed with the module information appearing in the Imported Modules in Concept Database window By clicking on the added module to select it the module details are shown With Help gt Help on Module the help of the selected module can be displayed Select File Save Changes to save the changes data base 8 Select File Exit for terminating Concept ModConnect Reaction The installed modules are now avaiable in the Concept I O map See Use of third party module in Concept p 847 Upgrate of Sangap Note The MDC File is dependent on the version of Concept so if you upgrade your Concept version make sure you get also an upgraded version of your previously used MDC files You will have to reinstall them 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 845 Concept ModConnect Rem
54. Concept Converter x x x x Modsoft converter x x x ModConnect tool x x x x available not available 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 643 Performance Runtime System Available Memory for User Program Different Performance Attributes Runtime System Performance CPU type 113 02 113 03 213 04 424 0x 434 12 534 14 16 bit CPU X 32 bit CPU x available not available Available memory for user program Performance CPU type 113 02 113 03 213 04 424 0x 434 12 534 14 IEC only runtime system 125k 375k 612k IEC and LL984 runtime system 160k 330k 460k 800k 2500k LL984 only runtime system x available not available Availability of different performance attributes Performance CPU type 113 02 113 03 213 04 424 0x 534 14 534 14 Battery adapter required for backing up IEC programs Floating point processor Floating point emulation IEC x available not available 644 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Performance Performance Attributes of Compact IEC and LL984 Support Special Performance Attributes Availability of IEC and LL984 support Performance CPU type 258 512k 265 512k 275
55. Creating the software connection Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM Step Action 1 Select the option Load File To PLC Response The Loading Process window is opened and the warning The PROGRAM contents of the device being loaded could be lost after loading a new Executive The CONTENTS stored in the Micro H H P will always be lost after loading a new Executive Would you like to continue Y N N is displayed 2 Acknowledge the warning with Y Response The message Node failed to enter normal mode appears 3 The DOWNLOAD PROGRESS window appears which shows the transfer rate Response After the transfer is complete the message Download Operation Successful appears 4 Confirm the message with RETURN Response You return to the main menu 5 Select the Exit Program option Response The DOS Loader is exited During transfer the CPU display is as follows LED Response Run slow flashing COM ACT not lit Modbus fast flashing After transfer the CPU display is as follows LED Response Run not lit COM ACT not lit Modbus fast flashing Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project p 43 Note If you recieve an error message close Concept and start the BDRESET EXE file in the Concept directory to reset the SA85 Then start again from the first step 840 USE 493 00
56. Delayed and saved 46 1 Simple string 46 2a Branching in string selection priority from left to right 46 3 Merging a string selection 46 4 Parallel strings branch and merge 46 5a String jump priority from left to right 46 6a String loop priority from left to right Note 1 Modicon TSX Quantum Pr fix 3 is used in the prefix IB ID position in all graphical languages Note 2 Modicon TSX Quantum Pr fix 4 is used in the prefix QB QD position in all graphical languages Note 3 The following functions are overloaded with reference to the data which is selected multiplexed or assigned the type statement refers to the selection parameters List of overloaded functions e SEL e MUX e MOVE All other functions are standardized e g REAL TRUNC INT 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 717 IEC conformity Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Note 8 Note 9 Note 10 Note 11 List of type conversion functions e BOOL_TO_BYTE BOOL_TO_DINT BOOL_TO_INT BOOL_TO_REAL BOOL TO TIME BOOL TO UDINT BOOL TO UINT BOOL TO WORD e BYTE TO BOOL BYTE TO DINT BYTE TO INT BYTE TO REAL BYTE TO TIME BYTE TO UDINT BYTE TO UINT BYTE TO WORD e DINT TO BOOL DINT TO BYTE DINT TO INT DINT TO REAL DINT TO TIME DINT TO UDINT DINT TO UINT DINT TO WORD e INT TO BOOL INT TO BYTE INT TO DINT INT TO REAL INT TO TIME INT TO UDINT INT TO UINT INT TO WORD e REAL TO BOOL REAL TO BYTE REAL TO DINT REAL TO INT REAL TO TIM
57. Description This section describes the available short cut keys There are editor independent and editor dependent short cut keys What s in this This section contains the following topics section Topic Page General Short Cut Keys 692 Short Cut Keys in the IL ST and Data Type Editor 693 Short Cut Keys in the FBD and SFC Editor 695 Shortcut keys in the LD Editor 699 Short Cut Keys in the LL984 Editor 705 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 691 List of symbols and short cut keys General Short Cut Keys Short Cut Keys The table shows the short cut keys available and the corresponding menu entry command Short Cut Keys Menu Entry Command Executed F1 Calls the context sensitive online help Use this key to call up an explanation of the menu entry command or dialog chosen In dialogs this key corresponds to the menu entry command Help Ctrl F4 System menu for the document window Close document window Ctrl F6 System menu for the document window Next Ctrl S Data file Save project save DFB Alt F4 Data file Quit the application window Concept Application F8 Project Address Declaration F3 Project Search Shift F3 Project Trace F5 Project Search results F6 Project Advanced search Alt F9 Project Analyze section Ctrl P Online Online Control F9 Online Trigger single cycle Ctrl R O
58. Ethernet MBX driver software for Windows NT is included along with other drivers on the CD MBX Driver Suite ver4 20 The installation is carried out by Autorun when the CD is inserted or can be manually started CD drive SETUP EXE Select the driver to be installed from the main menu You will then be taken through the installation step by step The driver is then configured 870 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Presettings for Modbus Plus Establishing the hardware connection Introduction Procedure Note Please refer to the Modbus Protocol Reference Guide for a detailed description of the hardware setup To establish the hardware connection do the following Step Action 1 Set a unique Modbus node address for the CPU using the rotary switch on the back of the module Note the Modbus node address set on the CPU s sliding cover Connect the CPU to the SA85 interface with a Modbus Plus cable Result The flash interval on the CPU Modbus display changes from 3 flashes per second with a pause to 6 without a pause 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 871 Presettings for Modbus Plus 872 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Presettings when using Modbus for startup K Introduction Overview The chapter provides a brief description of the presettings when using Modbus for startup What s in this This chapter contains the following
59. Example Profibus DP Export Settings in SyCon Introduction Preconditions SyCon is used to configure Profibus DP The procedure for this is to be found in the user manual provided by the manufacturer The settings for the export of the CNF file are explained in the following step by step instructions For CRP 811 00 diagnostics the serial interface of the host computer and the diagnostic interface of the bus controller must be linked with a V24 cable To display this diagnostic data terminal emulation software must be started e g PROCOMM using the settings 19 2 kBd 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity Defining the Firstly specify the destination directory in which all files are to be saved Destination est atio Step Action Directory 1 Select in the main menu Settings Search Path Response The Search Path dialog is opened and is pre set with the SyCon directory path as the project directory e g CAHILSCHER GMBH SYCON FIELDBUS PROFIBUS 2 Enter the path of the Concept directory e g C CONCEPT PROFIBUS in the Project Directory text box Note You can also accept the default Response Execution of the Save and Export menu commands in the File main menu saves all files in the entered Concept directory 778 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Generating an Export File Note about Saving Profibus DP Configuration in Concept To generate an export file
60. File Selection window is opened 2 Select the BIN file CTSX201D 3 Confirm your selection with RETURN Response You return to the main menu Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM Step Action 1 Select the option Load File To PLC Response The Loading Process window is opened and the warning The PROGRAM contents of the device being loaded could be lost after loading a new Executive The CONTENTS stored in the Micro H H P will always be lost after loading a new Executive Would you like to continue Y N N is displayed 2 Acknowledge the warning with Y Response The message Node failed to enter normal mode appears 3 The DOWNLOAD PROGRESS window appears which shows the transfer rate Response After the transfer is complete the message Download Operation Successful appears 4 Confirm the message with RETURN Response You return to the main menu 5 Select the Exit Program option Response The DOS Loader is exited 904 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus with DOS Loader during transfer CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows LED Response Ready lit Run slow flashing Modbus not lit Modbus fast flashing CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows transter LED Response Ready lit Run not lit Modbus not lit Modbus
61. I O map Repeat steps 1 to for all the modules in the example see dialog representation RIO slot 7 800 drop 3 In the Out Ref column enter the start references for the output modules Note Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 e g 100001 Coil References have the prefix 0 e g 000001 Input Register References have the prefix 3 e g 300001 and Output Register References have the prefix 4 e g 400001 Response The end reference of the available address range Out End column is entered automatically 752 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Dialog display Following module mapping and I O reference specification the dialog looks like this RIO slot 7 800 drop 3 Drop Module Modules 2 ASCII Port No None w Input bits 0 Params Input bits 0 Output bits 0 ls EA Output bits 24 Status table Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste Rack Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description id 1 1 B810 000065 000072 8 OUT ISO B804 400065 400065 16 OUT 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 2 1 2 2 2 3 v OK Cancel Help Poll Set module To set parameters for individual modules go
62. Keys p 692 entries Key Menu Entry Command Executed Ctrl A Edit Select All Ctrl Z Edit Reverse Delete Ctrl X Edit Cut Ctrl C Edit Copy Ctrl V Edit Add Del Edit Delete Ctrl O Display Overview Ctrl N Display Normal Ctrl E Display Expanded only in SFC Ctrl Display Enlarge Ctrl Display Reduce Ctrl Y In the Editor Online gt Animate binary values In SFC Editor Online gt Animation Ctrl W Online Selection animate in FBD Moving the Moving the cursor cursor Key Function Cursor keys The cursor keys move the cursor inside the document window The cursor is moved further around a Pixel If the cursor is at the edge of the document window pressing the cursor keys again will page the document window in the corresponding direction Ctrl Cursor Keys When the Strg key is pressed the cursor keys move the cursor inside the document window The cursor is moved further around a logical unit depending on the active editor If the cursor is at the edge of the document window pressing the cursor keys again will page the document window in the corresponding direction Home The Pos1 key moves the cursor to the left hand edge of the document window End The End key moves the cursor to the right hand edge of the document window 696 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 List of symbols and short cut keys Scrolling Edit Scrolling Key Function Citrl Home When the Ctrl key i
63. Objects Coil Negative Objects Contact on Objects Contact off hy Online Animate selection Online Animate binary values 686 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 List of symbols and short cut keys List of Symbols in the IL and ST Editor Symbols The table shows the additional symbols available in the IL and ST editor and the corresponding menu entry commands see also General icon bar p 682 Symbol Menu Entry Command Executed Objects Add FFB ky Online View Selections Online Animate binary values 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 687 List of symbols and short cut keys List of Symbols in the LL984 Editor Symbols The table shows the additional symbols available in the LL984 editor and the corresponding menu entry commands see also General icon bar p 682 Symbol Menu Entry Command Executed k Objects Select Mode e Objects Coil Objects Coil buffered Objects Horizontal Link 1 Objects Vertical Link 4 Objects Contact Objects Contact Open Objects Contact Positive Edge Objects Contact Negative Edge Objects Instruction Last oo i Objects Select instruction 688 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 List of symbols and short cut keys Icons in PLC Configuration Icons The table shows the icons also available in PLC config
64. Objects Contact Negative Flank Shift C Objects Coil Shift L Objects Coil Negative Shift S Objects Coil Set Shift R Objects Coil Reset Shift P Objects Coil Positive Flank Shift N Objects Coil Negative Flank Ctrl Y Online Animate binary values Ctrl W Online Animate selection 700 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 List of symbols and short cut keys Placing objects In order to place objects in the LD Editor by using the keyboard please carry out the following steps Step Action 1 Move the field with a gray background onto the field where the object is to be placed move gray field selecting a field 2 Strike the key assigned to the object see Creating objects p 704 Reaction Adjoining boolean objects are automatically connected 3 Links between non adjoining objects and non boolean in outputs have to be made with the mouse pointer see Moving the mouse pointer p 703 4 The mouse pointer must also be used to invert in outputs see Moving the mouse pointer p 703 Moving the gray Moving the gray field selecting a field age Function Up Moves the gray field up by one field Down Moves the gray field down by one field To the right Movesthe gray fields to the right by one field To the left Moves the gray fields to the left by one field Home Moves the gray field to the left margin Shift Home M
65. Option buttons 669 Status bar 663 Text boxes 669 Window 661 Window elements 663 Windows window types 662 xvii Index xviii
66. PLC 532 Setup and control PLC general information 533 SFC SFCSTEP STATE variable 223 SFCSTEP TIMES variable 222 Action 223 Action variable 224 Actions 241 alternative branch 230 Alternative connection 232 animation 252 255 Calling up macros 441 Edit 236 edit 235 Icon bar 684 Identifier 244 initial step 221 Jump 228 Learn monitoring times 257 Link 228 maximum supervision time 221 minimum supervision time 222 Objects 220 Online 251 online functions 252 255 Parallel branch 233 Parallel connection 234 Short Cut Keys 695 Step 221 step delay time 221 step duration 221 Step properties 239 string 255 Text object 234 transition 225 246 xiv Index Transition diagnosis 260 Transition section 226 Transition variable 227 waiting step 221 Short Cut Keys 679 691 692 693 695 699 705 Simple sequences 228 Simulate SPS 615 617 Simulation 613 615 617 Single sweeps 534 Special options 89 Specific data transfer 797 Speed optimized LL984 Processing 535 ST 321 Assign instructions 336 Block call up 350 Code generation 358 Expressions 324 Instructions 337 List of Symbols 687 Online functions 359 Operands 325 Operators 326 329 Program creation 360 Short Cut Keys 693 syntax check 357 ST Command 334 334 amp 334 333 AND 334 Boolean AND 334 Boolean OR 335 Commands 349 ELSE 341 ELSIF THEN 342 Equal to 333 Less than 334 Less t
67. RIO I O Bus Drop Parameters dialog Step Action 1 Select column No line 1 Response The 1 text box has a dark background i e the AMM 090 00 module has been selected for editing 2 Select the Params command button Response The 170 AMM 090 00 dialog is opened 3 Select the signal states for the input and output channels from the list boxes and exit the dialog using OK Note Help with this can be obtained from the help text in the parameter dialog Response The parameter settings are automatically allocated to the addresses 400009 400013 Dialog display 170 AMM 090 00 Eingangs Auswahl Ausgangs Auswahl Kanal 1 1 5V oder 4 20mA Kanal 1 Ausgang Sperren v Kanal 2 1 5V oder 4 20mA Kanal 1 R ckfall OMA bis 20mA 10 V bis 10 V Kanal 3 1 5V oder 4 20mA Kanal 2 Ausgang Sperren v Kanal 4 1 5V oder 4 20mA Kanal 2 R ckfall Ausgang auf Zero v Parameter Worte Wort 1 AAAA Wort2 0044 OK Abbrechen Hilfe 820 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples E 11 Momentum Example Ethernet Bus System Introduction Overview This chapter contains step by step instructions for the configuration of an Ethernet bus system with Momentum What s in this This section contains the following topics section Topic Page Configure Ethernet 822 Network Configuration in Different Operating Systems 823 Editing local drop 833 Online Verbindung herstellen 836 840 USE 493 0
68. September 2001 945 Modbus Plus with DOS Loader Momentum first startup for LL984 with DOS Loader Introduction This section describes the first startup of Momentum for LL984 when used with Modbus Plus Note Loading the EXEC file for LL984 is not necessary with a new computer since itis preloaded in the the CPUs Flash RAM Loading the EXEC file for LL984 is only necessary if you have already loaded the EXEC file for IEC and now wish to change You should always check to see if a new EXEC version has been released in the meantime This information and the current EXEC file can be found on our website at www schneiderautomation com You can see the currently loaded version of the EXEC file in Concept using the Online Online controller menu command The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections Start DOS Loader p 946 Define SA85 adapter p 947 Protocol settings p 947 Select EXEC file p 947 Load EXEC file p 948 Start DOS Loader procedure for launching DOS Loaders is as follows Step Action 1 If the CPU display Run is lit stop the program with Concept in main menu Online Response The Run display is no longer lit the Ready is now lit 2 Open the directory DAT CONCEPT DAT 3 Double click on the file LOADER EXE Response The installation program for the Executive file EXEC is started 4 Select the option Communication Parameters Response T
69. USE 493 00 September 2001 837 Convert Projects DFBs Macros Exporting The procedure for exporting projects DFBs macros is as follows project DFB macro earlier version of CAUTION Concept Risk of losing data The following steps must be performed in the EARLIER version of Concept The new version of Concept may only be installed once all existing projects have been exported Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage Step Action 1 Start the Concept converter 2 From File Export open the menu to select the export range 3 Select the required export range e Project with used DFBs All project information including the DFBs and data structures used within the project derived data types will be exported e Project with all DFBs macros All project information including all the DFBs and data structures derived data types will be exported Project without DFBs All project information including all data structures derived data types but excluding DFBs and macros will be exported e Single DFB with used DFBs single macro Only the selected DFB macro will be exported Reaction The select export data dialog box will be opened 4 Different file extensions must be selected depending on the element to be exported e Exporting projects From the Format list select the extension prj e Exporting DFBs From the Format list select the extension d
70. Windows Help system opens containing either e a table of contents if you started with Help Contents or the icon e or containing a description of the dialog if you started with the Help command button e or containing a description of an EFB if you started with the Help on Type command button e or containing a description of a module if you started with the Module Help command button This section describes the Concept specific basics of the online help window Online help window Title bar Concept User Manual BE File Edit Bookmark Options Menu bar Contents Contents Back Print lt lt gt gt History Toolbar Concept User Manual Navigator PLC Configuration Unconditional Configuration Map Topic title Introduction In the I O map configure the drops with the used modules Next carry out the I O addressing and the parameterization of the configured modules Popup Configuring the Backplane Expander To extend the backplane the module 140 XBE 100 00 is required This enables you to connect a second backplane and obtain an additional 13 slots A more detailed description of the configuration of the extended backplane with the 140 XBE 100 00 module can be found in the chapter Configuring the Backplane Expander Jump w 4 Title Bar The
71. address you set when installing the SA85 the CONFIG SYS file Parameter n Confirm your selection with RETURN 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 943 Modbus Plus with DOS Loader Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus Plus protocol settings Step Action 1 Enter in Enter First Routing Path the node address set on the CPU using a rotary switch on the back of the module 2 Confirm the entry with RETURN Response The option Enter second Routing Path appears 3 Acknowledge the option with RETURN Response The window for selecting the TARGET PATH appears Select the TARGET PATH 1 option Enter in Enter Software Interrupt gt the Interrupt 5c or 5d selected in the CONFIG SYS file 6 Select the ACCEPT CHANGES option Response You return to the main menu Select EXEC file out the following steps to select the EXEC file Step Action 1 Select the option File Selection Response The File Selection window is opened 2 Click on the BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired programming language See the table Loading Firmware for Momentum PLC Types p 951 3 Confirm your selection with RETURN Response You return to the main menu 944 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus Plus with DOS Loader Load EXEC file CPU display during transfer CPU display after transfer
72. can be used to move within the list As arule only a single entry can be chosen form the list There are however some cases in which several entries can be chosen e g when opening sections A single line list box initially appears as a rectangular box in which the current selection the default value is selected If the arrow in the right of the box is selected a list of the available selection possibilities opens If more possibilities are available than fit into the list then the scrollbar or arrow keys can be used to move around the list Option buttons represent mutually exclusive options In each case only one option can be chosen The selected option button is identified by a black dot If the option name contains an underlined letter the option button can be activated from any position in the dialog box by holding down Alt and entering the underlined letter 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 669 Windows interface Check box A check box next to an option means that the option can be activated or deactivated Any number of check box options can be activated Activated options are identified by an X or a check mark If the option name contains an underlined letter the check box can be activated or deactivated from any position in the dialog box by holding down Alt and entering the underlined letter 670 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Windows interface B 4 Generating a project symbol
73. execution The menu command is active If the menu command is selected the check mark disappears and the menu command is inactive The check mark is mostly used to identify active modes e g normal display dial in mode etc The key combinations e g F8 Alt F9 Ctrl R after the menu command are shortcut keys for executing this menu command Using this key or key combination the menu command can be selected without having to open the menu 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 667 Windows interface B 3 Dialog boxes Dialog boxes At a Glance In Concept dialog boxes are displayed if additional information is required from you in order to perform a particular task Potentially necessary information is also communicated in this way Most dialog boxes contain options which can be selected textboxes in which text can be entered and buttons which can be pressed Grayed out options are currently not available One or more other commands must be executed or options selected or deselected before the desired option can be activated Concept specific basics of a window One line list List Control box Step name EXER Initial step Comment Actio Time Action Cdet O Variable Literal Variable
74. first of all with the definition of all drops Note For an error free transfer of the INTERBUS configuration it should be ensured that sufficient memory is available To optimise the storage allocation open the PLC Memory Partition dialog PLC Configuration PLC Memory Partition When editing the first local drop the modules must be set with their I O references before parameters can be set forindividual modules Atrium INTERBUS Controller D MB 2 INTERBUS M INTERBUS INTERBUS Host computer for Concept and CMD V24 cable PC104 board on a standard AT board INTERBUS configuration N 806 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Defining Drops To define drops proceed as follows in the PLC Configuration window Step Action 1 Select PLC Selection Response The PLC selection dialog is opened 2 Select the Atrium PLC family and a 180 CCO 121 01 Using OK return to the PLC Configuration window 3 Select I O Map Response The I O Map dialog is opened and the first drop is automatically entered in the table 4 Enter a 7 in RIO Slot and quit the dialog using OK Response
75. following steps to define the LAN address set in the CONFIG SYS file r adapte Step Action 1 Select the adapter address you set when installing the SA85 in the CONFIG SYS file Parameter n 2 Confirm your selection with RETURN 934 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus Plus with DOS Loader Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus Plus protocol settings Step Action 1 Enter in Enter First Routing Path the node address set on the CPU using a rotary switch on the back of the module Confirm the entry with RETURN Response The option Enter second Routing Path appears Acknowledge the option with RETURN Response The window for selecting the TARGET PATH appears Select the TARGET PATH 1 option Enter in Enter Software Interrupt gt the Interrupt 5c or 5d selected in the CONFIG SYS file Select the ACCEPT CHANGES option Response You return to the main menu Select EXEC file out the following steps to select the EXEC file Step Action 1 Select the option File Selection Response The File Selection window is opened Click on the BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired programming language See the table Loading Firmware for Quantum PLC Types p 950 Confirm your selection with RETURN Response You return to the main menu 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 935 Modbus Plus wi
76. for a computer or to join a domain Properties OK Cancel Apply 3 Select the Network ID command button Response The assistant for creating a user on the network is started Or select the Properties command button Response The Identification Changes dialog box is opened 4 Exit the dialog using OK 832 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Editing local drop Introduction This section describes the configuration of the local I O station Drop The processing sequence begins first of all with the definition of the drop When editing the local I O station Drop the I O unit must be specified with its I O references before parametering of the individual assemblies can take place Note Only particular CPUs can be used for the Ethernet bus configuration The following CPUs are available e 171 CCC 980 30 e 171 CCC 960 30 e 171 CCC 980 20 e 171 CCC 960 20 Momentum Ethernet Bus System 1 Host Computer Ethernet network card I O unit e g 170 AMM 090 00 CPU adapter e g 171 CCC 960 20 IEC Hub or Switch a A o ND 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 833 Configuration exa
77. in current segment Ctrl Home same 856 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modsoft and 984 References Funtion Modsoft 2 x Key Concept Key Goto last network in current segment Ctrl End same Insert equation Ins Ctrl Q Append Ctrl A Append equation gt Ctrl U Delete current network Ctrl K Copy to the clipboard Ctrl C Undo Ctrl Z Closing an mdi child window Ctrl F4 Switching to the next open mdi child Ctrl F6 window Status Line These Concept keys change the status line display value of the currently selected Values reference A ASCII H Hexidecimal D Decimal signed U Decimal unsigned R Real L Long 32 bit S Short 16 bit 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 857 Modsoft and 984 References Modsoft Function Compatibility Not Supported Features User Interface Difference Constant Sweep How to Start the Constant Sweep The following Modsoft functions are not supported in Concept e Macros macro programming e SFC use IEC SFC instead e Search of comments Concept is an MS Windows based application Modsoft is a DOS based application Concept uses MS Windows user interface standards and practices Functions of Concept with 984 Ladder editor are based on the pre existing functions of Concept There are no exact similarities of specific user actions required to perform Concept tasks as compared to Modsoft tasks Concept has
78. in each Concept project and are occupied in the DFB directory directly under the Concept directory Some EFB libraries e g the IEC library are divided into groups This facilitates EFB location especially in expansive libraries Host Computer Hardware and software which support programming configuring testing operating and error searching in the PLC application as well as ina remote system application in order to enable source documentation and archiving The programming device can also be possibly used for the display of the process 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 969 Glossary I O Map The I O and expert modules from the various CPUs are configured in the I O map Icon Graphical representation of different objects in Windows e g drives application programs and document windows IEC 61131 3 International standard Programmable Logic Controls Part 3 Programming languages IEC Format There is an IEC type designation in initial position of the address followed by the QW1 five figure address e 0x12345 Q12345 e 1x12345 90112345 e 3x12345 IW12345 e 4x12345 QW12345 IEC name An identifier is a sequence of letters numbers and underscores which must begin conventions with either a letter or underscore i e the name of a function block type an instance identifier a variable or a section Letters of a national typeface i e 6 0 can be used except in project and DFB names Underscores
79. inhibited and will not be processed The third part of the status bar indicates the status of the PLC NOT CONNECTED The programming device is not coupled with a PLC STOPPED The program on the PLC is suspended RUNNING CHANGE CONFIG The program on the PLC is running and was connected with the access Change Configuration In the fourth part of the status bar the program status between the PLC and programming device is displayed This display only appears if a project is open and the programming device with PLC is online EQUAL The program on the programming device and the PLC is consistent UNEQUAL The program on the programming device and the PLC is not consistent To establish consistency use the menu command Online Download MODIFIED The program on the programming device was modified The modifications can be made online in the PLC with the menu command Online gt Download changes Status bar T1 AT 1 00001 Transition T1 ANIMATED RUNNING CHANGE CONFIG EQUAL 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 665 Windows interface B 2 Menu commands Menu commands At a Glance Underlined letter The titles of the individual menus are displayed in the menu bar The menu commands are listed in the pull down menus As in Windows each Concept window and dialog box has a system menu This menu is opened using the small box in the top left hand corner of the wind
80. inserted in the I O map in slot 7 of the selected drop In the Go To list box the Local RIO Slot 7 network link is displayed 6 Select the last line in the table Select the Insert command button Response The second drop is entered in the Type column Note The number of drops to be inserted is defined in the segment scheduler dialog The default defines a maximum number of 32 7 Select the second drop and in the Type column open the list box Select the SY MAX option Dialog display VO Map Reserve for expansion 144 4 gt Insert Delete Go To Local RIO slot 7 v Cut Copy Paste Drop Type Supervision In bits Outbits Status Edit 1 Quantum I O 3 0 0 Edit 2 SY MAX Y 3 0 0 Edit To insert at the end of the list select this line Remote OK Cancel Help 8 Select the first drop from the Drop column Select the Edit command button Response You reach the module map 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 771 Configuration examples Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the Local Modules and Quantum Drop dialog Specifying I O Step Keien References 1 Select the Module column Response The I O Module Selection dialog is opened 2 From the Category column select the all option Response All modules are listed in the Modules column 3 In the Modules column select the CPS 214 00 module Exit the dialog with OK Response The module
81. instance name is always formed as follows FBI_n_m FBI Function Block Instance n section number current number m Number of the FFB object in the section current number Generating an Instance 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 971 Glossary Instruction IL Instruction LL984 Instruction ST Instruction list IL INT Integer literals INTERBUS PCP Invocation Instructions are the commands of the IL programming language Each instruction begins on a new line and is performed by an operator with a modifier if necessary and if required for the current operation by one or more operands If several operands are used they are separated by commas A character can come before the instruction which is then followed by a colon The commentary must where available be the last element of the line When programming electrical controls the user should implement operation coded instructions in the form of picture objects which are divided into a recognizable contact form The designed program objects are on a user level converted to computer usable OP codes during the download process The OP codes are decoded in the CPU and processed by the firmware functions of the controller in a way that the required control is implemented Instructions are the commands of the ST programming language Instructions must be concluded by semicolons Several instructions can be entered in one line separated by semicol
82. is inserted in the I O map 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example see Local Quantum Drop dialog representation 5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns set the start references for the input and output modules Note Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 e g 100001 Coil References have the prefix 0 e g 000001 Input Register References have the prefix 3 e g 300001 and Output Register References have the prefix 4 e g 400001 Response The end reference column In End or Out End of the available address range is automatically entered 772 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Dialog display Following module mapping and I O reference specification the dialog looks like this Local Quantum Drop Drop r Module Modules 7 ASCII Port None w Input bits 0 Parans Input bits 176 Output bits 0 mi Output bits 96 Status table Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Rack Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description ia 14 CPS 214 00 DC SUMMABLE PS 2 1 2 CPU x13 0x CPU 1xMB 1 3 DDI 353 00 100001 100032 DC IN 24V 4x8 1 4 DDO 353 00 000001 000032 DC OUT 24V 4x8 1 5 AVI 030 00 300001 300
83. is made between local and global macros Macros have the following properties e Macros can only be created in the FBD and LD programming languages Macros only contain one section Macros can contain a section of any complexity In programming terms there is no difference between an instanced macro i e a macro inserted into a section and a conventionally created section DFB invocation in a macro Declaring variables Using macro specific data structures Automatic transfer of the variables declared in the macro Initial value for variables Multiple instancing of a macro in the entire program with differing variables The name of the section variable names and data structure names can contain up to 10 different exchange marks 0 to 29 Man Machine Interface Variables to which a Derived data type defined with STRUCT or ARRAY is allocated variables A distinction is made here between field variables and structured variables N Network A network is the collective switching of devices to a common data path which then Network node Node communicate with each other using a common protocol A node is a device with an address 1 64 on the Modbus Plus network Node is a programming cell in a LL984 network A cell node consists of a 7x11 matrix i e 7 rows of 11 elements 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 975 Glossary An operand is a literal a variable a function invocation or an expre
84. key words data type editor 475 derived data type 475 Keys 679 691 692 693 695 699 705 L Ladder Diagram 187 Ladder Logic 984 363 LD 187 actual parameters 201 animation 210 Calling a macro 444 Closer 192 code generation 209 Coil negated 194 Coil negative edge 195 Coil positive edge 194 Coil reset 195 Coil set 195 Coils 193 Contacts 192 193 Data flow 207 derived function block 198 EFB 196 viii Index elementary function 196 elementary function block 197 EN 200 ENO 200 Execution sequence 207 FFB 196 function 196 function block 197 Icon bar 686 link 200 loops 207 online functions 210 Opener 192 program creation 213 Shortcut keys 699 Text object 203 UDEFB 199 user defined elementary function 199 user defined elementary function block 199 Learn monitoring times SFC 257 Libraries 8 Limitations LL984 366 Link PLC 518 FBD 172 LD 200 List of Symbols 679 687 688 List of Tools 679 687 688 Literals 34 LL984 363 Close Column 372 Combination mode 387 Dialog interaction 369 Direct programming 387 DX Zoom 374 Edit 368 371 Editing Networks 373 Equation network 378 379 Equation network Syntax and Semantics 383 List of Symbols 688 Momentum first startup 893 909 929 946 Navigation 368 Online Restriction 369 Online Search 375 Open Column 372 Open Row 372 Programming modes 387 Reference Offset 371 Referenc
85. module mapping and I O reference specification the dialog looks like this Local Quantum Drop Drop Module Modules 7 ASCII Port No None w Input bits 4272 Params Input bits 176 Output bits 0 Output bits 96 Status table Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste Rack Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description 1 1 CPS 214 00 DC SUMMABLE PS 2 1 2 CPU x13 0x CPU 1xMB 1 3 DDI 353 00 100001 100032 DC IN 24V 4x8 1 4 DDO 353 00 000001 000032 DC OUT 24V 4x8 1 5 AVI 030 00 300001 300009 AN IN 8CH BIPOLAR 1 6 AVO 020 00 400001 400004 AN OUT 4CH VOLT NOM 2xx 00 MN1 MB 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 v 4 OK Cancel Help Poll To set parameters for the individual modules proceed as follows in the Local Quantum Drop dialog Step Action 1 From the Rack Slot column select the 1 3 line Response The 1 3 text box has a dark background i e the DDI 353 00 module has been selected for editing Note Parameters are not set for the CPS 214 00 and CPU x13 0x modules 2 Select the Params command button Response The 140 DDI 353 00 dialog is opened 3 Select the Discrete option button Response You return to the I O map 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the module
86. no off line selection to set the constant sweep mode This mode is available from the Online Control Panel Once constant sweep has been set in the controller you can upload the controller and save the project The constant sweep settings will be retained in the project If this project is downloaded the constant sweep settings will be set Note Any changes to the controller configuration cause the constant sweep Settings to be reset i e constant sweep is disabled whenever the controller configuration changes Follow the steps above to reenable constant sweep To set constant sweep before starting the controller follow these steps Step Action 1 Create your configuration and program logic offline 2 Download your program to the controller When the dialog appears asking Do you want to start the controller click on the No button From the Online menu choose Online Control Panel Set the constant sweep mode and sweep time Start the controller 858 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Presettings when using Modbus Plus for startup J Introduction Overview This chapter provides a brief description of the presettings when using Modbus Plus for first startup What s in this This chapter contains the following topics chapter Topic Page Installing the SA85 in Windows 98 2000 860 Installing the SA85 in Windows NT 863 Installing the Modbus Plus Drive
87. normal conditions the secondary PLC does not take over the control function but checks the status information in order to detect errors 976 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Glossary Project Project database Prototype file Concept EFB General description for the highest level of a software tree structure which specifies the super ordinate project name of a PLC application After specifying the project name you can save your system configuration and your control program under this name All data that is created whilst setting up the configuration and program belongs to this super ordinate project for this specific automation task General description for the complete set of programming and configuration information in the project database which represents the source code that describes the automation of a system The database in the host computer which contains the configuration information for a project The prototype file contains all the prototypes of the assigned functions In addition if one exists a type definition of the internal status structure is specified REAL Real literals Real literals with exponents REAL stands for the data type floating point number The entry can be real literal or real literal with an exponent The length of the data element is 32 bits The value range for variables of this data type extends from 8 43E 37 to 3 36E 38 Note Dependent on the mathematical processor type of
88. on the page Response The dialog Communication Protocol is opened 888 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus with EXECLoader Define Modbus Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus interface interface Step Action 1 Select the Option button Modbus RTU RS232 for the RTU transfer mode Select the Option button Modbus ASCII RS232 for the ASCII transfer mode Note Data transfer can only take place if you have configured the same transfer mode RTU or ASCII on the CPU using a button on the front of the module Click on the command button Next Response The dialog Modbus Target RTU ASCII mode is opened Use the command button COM Port Settings to open the dialog COM Properties Use the list field Connect using to select the programming cable interface on the PC default setting is COM1 Use the list field Bits per second to select the Baudrate default is 9600 Use the list field Parity to select the parity default is EVEN Use the list field Stop Bits to select the Stop bits default is 1 0 Oc Click on the command button OK Response The dialog is closed and you return to the dialog Modbus Target gt RTU ASCII Mode 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 889 Modbus with EXECLoader Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus protocol Step Action 1 Click on
89. ordinate PLC takes place via the remote I O bus at 1 5Mb per second A super ordinate PLC can support up to 31 D908 processors addresses 2 32 The DDE interface enables a dynamic data exchange between two programs in Windows The user can also use the DDE interface in the extended monitor to invoke their own display applications With this interface the user i e the DDE client can not only read data from the extended monitor DDE server but also write data to the PLC via the server The user can therefore alter data directly in the PLC while monitoring and analyzing results When using this interface the user can create their own Graphic Tool Face Plate or Tuning Tool and integrate into the system The tools can be written in any language i e Visual Basic Visual C which supports DDE The tools are invoked when the user presses one of the buttons in the Extended Monitor dialog field Concept Graphic Tool Configuration signals can be displayed as a timing diagram using the DDE connection between Concept and Concept Graphic Tool Mechanism for specifying the definition of a language element A declaration usually covers the connection of an identifier to a language element and the assignment of attributes such as data types and algorithms The definitions file contains general descriptive information on the selected EFB and its formal parameters Derived data types are data types which are derived from Elementary Data Types
90. other nodes have read only access to these variables So by definition there is a maximum of 64 32 words of global memory available to a Modbus Plus network segment Nodes connected to different through bridges or gateways segment cannot share global memory When a PLC provides 32 words of global memory it does so by assigning holding registers for broadcast and when the PLC wants to read global variables provided by another Peer Cop node assigning holding registers to receive them These registers are called Global Input from other nodes and Global Output what this node provides get updated cyclically in case of a PLC after every scan Actually every Modbus Plus node has its own communication processor the so called Peer processor in addition to the processor that controls the node specific work in case of a PLC solving user logic This leads to some routing paths the global data has to pass to traverse from one node to the other e From the data provider e g user logic to the local most times embedded peer processor e From the local peer processor to the other peer processors this takes the token cycle time of the Modbus Plus network segment that depends directly on the number of connected nodes e From the peer processor of the data receiver to the data receiver itself that is usually the user logic in the receiver PLC The actual update time depends on the speed of the Modbus Plus network segment and that
91. project name definition 956 reading global DFBs 957 register address format settings 956 representation of internal data 959 settings for online animation 960 storage of global DFBs during upload 957 variable storage settings 956 Configuration 63 General information 65 Optional 84 Unconditional 71 Configuration example Quantum remote control with RIO 735 Configuration example Atrium INTERBUS controller 804 Configuration example Compact Compact controller 799 Configuration example Momentum remote I O bus 813 Configuration example Quantum INTERBUS control 763 Profibus DP controller 777 Remote control with DIO 754 Remote control with RIO series 800 743 SY MAX controller 769 Peer Cop 791 Configuration examples 733 Configuration extensions 86 Configuration in OFFLINE and ONLINE mode 68 General information 69 Configuration of Peer Cop 793 Configuration of various network systems 94 Configurator Ethernet I O Scanner 100 Configure Backplane Expander Config 91 INTERBUS 95 RTU extension 99 SoftPLC 97 Ethernet 98 Profibus DP 96 Configure Ethernet 822 98 Configure INTERBUS system 95 Configure network systems 86 94 Configure Profibus DP system 96 Configure SoftPLC 97 Connect PLC general information 519 Connecting IEC Simulator 32 bit 530 Constant scan 533 Constants 34 Contact change LD 206 replace LD 206 LD 192 193 Context help 673 Controller status 519 Convert
92. remote bus nodes TIOs can be constructed However the branch interfaces can only be inserted in the remote bus not in the remote bus branch Parameterization Command sequence parameterization restart procedure occurs in the CMD Tool produced by the PHONIX firm see also NOA 611 1 restart procedure with an example for parameterizing the command sequence in CMD Tool 764 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Editing Local Drop Introduction This section describes the configuration of the first local drop The processing sequence begins first of all with the definition of the drop When editing the first local drop the modules must be set with their I O references before parameters can be set for individual modules Note When the NOA 61 1 00 module is entered in the I O map the loadable ULEX is automatically installed Quantum INTERBUS controller D C CIDIDAJ AIN PIPID DIVIV O SUJI TIO 1 TIO 2 TIO Local Quantum Drop 2 INTERBUS master module 3 Remote bus without branch interface 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 765 Configuration examples Note The configuration of remote bus nodes does not take place in Concept and is therefore not apparent in the I O map To edit the remote bus nodes you must use the CMD tool produced by the PHONIX firm Configuratio
93. standard which only permits the use of a single IEC language for a POU body Only the SFC language also provides the opportunity to formulate parts of the body in different languages because transitions and actions can be expressed in any language in as far as the corresponding properties are supported by the programming system 730 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 IEC conformity D 4 Text language syntax Text Language Syntax Description The programming system Concept supports the complete language syntax as specified in appendix B of the IEC language standard 1131 3 with the following exceptions e Syntax productions in appendix B of 1131 3 belonging to properties which according to the IEC standards tables in EC standards tables p 712 in this document are not supported by Concept are not implemented e The use of some Concept supported properties is according to the associated remarks in the IEC standards table only possible in a restricted or modified form The associated syntax productions are therefore only occasionally or somewhat differently implemented e Concept supports the NOT Operator for inverting Boolean battery content in IL e The implementation of some faulty syntax productions in appendix B of 1131 3 improved upon either in the corrigendum to 1131 3 or in the planned amendment to 1131 3 uses the suggestions in these documents for orientation The improved productions are implemented in C
94. the BDRESET EXE file in the Concept directory to reset the SA85 Then start again from the first step 936 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus Plus with DOS Loader Compact first startup with DOS Loader Introduction Start DOS Loader Define SA85 adapter This section describes the first startup of Compact when used with Modbus Plus The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections e Start DOS Loader p 937 Define SA85 adapter p 937 Protocol settings p 938 Select EXEC file p 938 Load EXEC file p 939 The procedure for launching DOS Loaders is as follows Step Action 1 If the CPU display Run is lit stop the program with Concept in main menu Online Response The Run display is no longer lit the Ready is now lit Open the directory DAT CONCEPT DAT Double click on the file LOADER EXE Response The installation program for the Executive file EXEC is started Select the option Communication Parameters Response The dialog box Communication setup is opened Select the Modbus Plus option Response The Modbus Plus communication setup window is opened Carry out the following steps to define the LAN address set in the CONFIG SYS file Step Action 1 Select the adapter address you set when installing the SA85 the CONFIG SYS file Parameter n 2 Confirm your selection with RETURN 840 USE 493 00 Septem
95. the CPU different ranges within this permissable value range cannot be represented This applies to values that are approaching ZERO and for values that approach INFINITY In these cases NAN Not A Number or INF INFinite will be displayed in the animation mode instead of a number value Real literals are used to input floating point values into the decimal system Real literals are denoted by a decimal point The values can have a preceding sign Single underscores _ between numbers are not significant Example 12 0 0 0 0 456 3 14159 26 Real literals with exponents are used to input floating point values into the decimal system Real literals with exponents are identifiable by a decimal point The exponent indicates the power of ten with which the existing number needs to be multiplied in order to obtain the value to be represented The base can have a preceding negative sign The exponent can have a preceding positive or negative sign Single underscores _ between numbers are not significant Only between numbers not before or after the decimal point and not before or after E E or E 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 977 Glossary Reference Register in the extended memory 6x reference Remote Network DIO RIO Remote I O RTU Mode Runtime error Example 1 34 12 or 1 34e 12 1 0E 6 or 1 0e 6 1 234E6 or 1 234e6 Every direct address is a reference that begin
96. the command button Scan Response The nodes on the Modbus network are read and displayed graphically in the left window A green point in the graphic indicates that the CPU is in RUN mode To stop the CPU continue as described in step 3 2 Double click on the read network node in the graphical display Response The Modbus address of the node is automatically entered in the textfeld Modbus Address 3 Click the right mouse button in the left window Response A context menu with individual PLC commands is opened 4 If the Run display is lit on the CPU stop the program using the command Stop PLC Response A message window appears where you can click OK to confirm stopping the CPU 5 Click the command button OK to confirm stopping the CPU Response You return to the dialog Modbus Target RTU mode and the green point disappears from the graph 6 Activate the check box Bridge if the connection to the Modbus node should be made via a Modbus Plus network using a Modbus bridge 7 Press the appropriate Option button for your system PLC Direct Device Local Head Remote I O Drop 8 Click on the command button Next Response The Operation dialog is opened 890 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus with EXECLoader Select EXEC file out the following steps to select the EXEC file Step Action 1 Press the Option button Transfer EXEC to Device 2 Click on the command button Browse
97. the table Loading Firmware for Momentum PLC Types p 951 Confirm your selection with RETURN Response You return to the main menu 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 947 Modbus Plus with DOS Loader Load EXEC file CPU display during transfer CPU display after transfer Creating the Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM Step Action 1 Select the option Load File To PLC Response The Loading Process window is opened and the warning The PROGRAM contents of the device being loaded could be lost after loading a new Executive The CONTENTS stored in the Micro H H P will always be lost after loading a new Executive Would you like to continue Y N N is displayed 2 Acknowledge the warning with Y Response The message Node failed to enter normal mode appears 3 The DOWNLOAD PROGRESS window appears which shows the transfer rate Response After the transfer is complete the message Download Operation Successful appears 4 Confirm the message with RETURN Response You return to the main menu 5 Select the Exit Program option Response The DOS Loader is exited During transfer the CPU display is as follows LED Response Run slow flashing COM ACT not lit Modbus fast flashing After transfer the CPU display is as follows LED Response Run not lit COM ACT not lit Modbus f
98. title bar contains the active help file names or in other words the help project Menu Bar A description of the standard menu bar can be found in the respective Microsoft Windows manual 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 675 Windows interface Toolbar Title of Topic Navigator Jump The following buttons are available in Concept Contents This button is used to invoke the online help contents directory Details about this function can be found in the corresponding Windows Manual Note If you jump See Jump p 676 between different help projects and click the Contents button the contents of the invoked help project rather than the current one is displayed This is a Microsoft error The Navigator is available to allow you to navigate within the current help project related topics Navigator p 676 Index This button is used to invoke an index for finding help texts Details about this function can be found in the corresponding Windows Manual Note If you want to carry out a search of the whole text press the Index command button select the Search index card choose the desired search function and type in the term you re looking for Back This button is used to invoke the previously read help text Print This button is used to print out the current topic the current help topic This button is used to browse the previous help text This button is used to read the online help like a book When you
99. topics chapter Topic Page Interface settings in Windows 98 2000 874 Interface Settings in Windows NT 876 Setting up the hardware connection 876 Transfer problems 877 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 873 Presetting for Modbus Plus Interface settings in Windows 98 2000 Win 98 Interface Carry out the following steps to set the interface in Windows 98 setting Step Action 1 Select the Desktop symbol Response All available objects are displayed 2 Select the Control Panel symbol Response All available objects are displayed 3 Select the System symbol Response The System Properties dialog is opened 4 Select the register card Device Manager Select Connections COM and LPT Response The branch COM connection COMx and printer port LPTx are displayed 6 Select COM connection COMx Response The Properties for COM connection COMx dialog is opened Select the register card Connection settings Select the Advanced command button Response The Connection settings dialog is opened 9 Tick the check box Use FIFO buffer Note Using the FIFO First In First Out buffer requires a serial port with 16550 compatible UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter 10 Use the slide control to change the recieve and send buffer which are both set to maximum size 11 Close all dialogs with OK 874 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Presetting for M
100. with tags as specified in the corrigendum to 1131 3 Purpose of Sections serve various purposes sections e Sections permit the functional division of an expansive POU body The body of a POU can be divided into sensible functional parts The section list represents a kind of functional table of contents for a large otherwise unstructured POU body e Sections permit the graphical division of an expansive POU body in accordance with an intentionally graphic form of representation sub structures of an expansive body can be established Smaller or larger partial structures may be chosen e The division of an expansive POU body enables faster online changes the section serves as the unit for online changes in Concept If the POU body is changed in various places during the program runtime all sections affected by the changes are taken into account if explicitly initiated reloading occurs e Sections permit the execution sequence to influence particular marked parts of the POU body the section name serves as a marking for the part of the body contained in the section and the execution sequence of the sections can be changed by ranking the sections see also the last part of the implementation dependent parameters table for information on the execution sequence of networks in the FBD language e Sections permit the parallel use of different languages in the same POU this property is a considerable expansion of the syntax of the IEC 1131 3
101. 0 September 2001 821 Configuration examples Configure Ethernet Preconditions Installing the PCI network card Network configuration Installing Drivers Addressing the M1 Ethernet CPU To configure an Ethernet bus system the following preconditions must be fulfilled e PCI network cards in the host computer Installation of the network card driver Setting Ethernet interface parameters Addressing the M1 Ethernet CPU For a link to an Ethernet bus system an Ethernet interface located on a PCI network card must be available in the host computer This card can be upgraded in PCs as long as a PCI slot is available Information about this can be found in the computer manufacturer s user manual Network configurations for different operating systems are given in section Network Configuration in Different Operating Systems p 823 Following the installation of the PCI network card the drivers which come with the network card must be installed To proceed further the IP address of the network card is required it may be necessary to contact network administrator The M1 Ethernet CPU does not have an IP address when supplied and must therefore be determined in the Ethernet I O Scanner dialog The address for the gateway and Subnet Mask is also determined in this dialog The IP address can be assigned via the system administrator or the BOOTP server Note It is important to ensure that the IP address
102. 0 V Kanal 3 1 5V oder 4 20mA v Kanal 2 Ausgang Sperren v Kanal 4 1 5V oder 4 20mA v Kanal 2 R ckfall Ausgang auf Zero v Parameter Worte Wort 1 AAAA Wort2 0044 OK Abbrechen Hilfe 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 835 Configuration examples Connect online Introduction This chapter describes how a link is created between the programming device and the Ethernet bus system Creating a link For the link between the programming device and the Ethernet bus system use the Concept main menu Online and proceed as follows Step Action 1 Select menu command Link Response The Link to PLC dialog box opens From the list Protocol type select the link TCP IP Response The zone Protocol settings alters for the TCP IP settings In the text box IP address or DNS hostname enter the IP address of the Ethernet network card PCI card Note Make sure that the address in Concept matches the address in Network settings of the operating system See Network configuration in Win 98 p 823 Response An online link exists between the programming device and the Ethernet bus system and all bus nodes are displayed in the list Dialog display Link to PLC Protocol type Pr l ings TCP IP Modbus otocol settings TC Modbus Plus IP address or DNS Hostn
103. 009 AN IN 8CH BIPOLAR 1 6 AVO 020 00 400001 400004 AN OUT 4CH VOLT CPR 93x 00 RIO Head 8908 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 v 4 OK Cancel Help Poll Set module To set parameters for the individual modules proceed as follows in the Local parameters Quantum Drop dialog Step Action 1 From the Rack Slot column select the 1 3 line Response The 1 3 text box has a dark background i e the DDI 353 00 module has been selected for editing Note Parameters are not set for the CPS 214 00 and CPU x13 0x modules 2 Select the Params command button Response The 140 DDI 353 00 dialog is opened 3 Select the Discrete option button Response You return to the I O map 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example Note The modules are sometimes set with different parameters Help with this can be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 773 Configuration examples Editing Remote Drop Editing the drop defined second takes place in the dialog RIO slot 7 SY MAX l O St 2 This dialog can be reached in two ways e Inthe I O Map dialog using the Edit command button or e in the Local Quantum Drop dialog using the Next command button Editing Remote Drop Introduction This section describes the configuration of the second remote drop The drop has already been defined in Editing the First local Drop See Editing Local Drop
104. 01 100032 DC IN 24V 4x8 1 4 DDO 353 00 000001 000032 DC OUT 24V 4x8 1 5 AVI 030 00 300001 300009 AN IN 8CH BIPOLAR 1 6 AVO 020 00 400001 400004 AN OUT 4CH VOLT NOA 611 00 300010 300276 400005 400268 IBS Head Mode2 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 m v 4 OK Cancel Help Poll Set module To set parameters for the individual modules proceed as follows in the Local parameters Quantum Drop dialog Step Action 1 From the Rack Slot column select the 1 3 line Response The 1 3 text box has a dark background i e the DDI 353 00 module has been selected for editing Note Parameters are not set for the CPS 214 00 and CPU x13 0x modules 2 Select the Params command button Response The 140 DDI 353 00 dialog is opened 3 Select the Discrete option button Response You return to the I O map 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example Note The modules are sometimes set with different parameters Help with this can be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog 768 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples E 5 Quantum Example SY MAX Controller Introduction Overview What s in this section This Chapter contains the step by step process for the configuration of a SY MAX controller This section contains the following topics Topic Page Editing Local Drop 770 Editing Remote Drop 774 840 US
105. 01 651 Performance CPU type Performance 70000 76000 76010 96020 96030 700 10 78010 980 20 980 30 780 00 LL984 LL984 only X x x X available not available Utilities Availability of utilities CPU type Performance 70000 76000 76010 96020 96030 700 10 78010 98020 980 30 780 00 Concept DFB x x x Concept EFB x x x Concept SIM x x x Concept PLCSIM32 x x x Concept security x x x Concept EXECLoader x x x x Concept Converter x x x x x Modsoft converter x x x x x Concept ModConnect x x x x x X available not available Runtime System Runtime System CPU type Performance 70000 76000 76010 96020 96030 700 10 780 10 980 20 980 30 780 00 16 bit CPU x x x x x 32 bit CPU X available not available 652 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Performance Different Availability of different performance attributes Performance Attributes CPU type Performance 70000 76000 76010 96020 96030 700 10 780 10 980 20 980 30 780 00 Battery adapter required for backing up IEC programs 1 Floating point processor Floating point emulation IEC 1 available not available Performance Attributes of Atrium IEC and LL984 Av
106. 1 Click on the command button Scan Response The nodes on the Modbus Plus network are read and displayed graphically in the left window A green point in the graphic indicates that the CPU is in RUN mode To stop the CPU continue as described in step 3 Double click on the read network node in the graphical display Response The Modbus address of the node is automatically entered in the textfeld In the text field Modbus Plus Address Click the right mouse button in the left window Response A context menu with individual PLC commands is opened If the Run display is liton the CPU stop the program using the command Stop PLC Response A message window appears where you can click OK to confirm stopping the CPU Click the command button OK to confirm stopping the CPU Response You return to the Modbus Plus Target dialog and the green point disappears from the graph Activate the check box Bridge if the connection to the Modbus network node should be made via a Modbus network using a Modbus bridge Press the appropriate Option button for your system PLC Local Head Remote Drop Click on the command button Next Response The Operation dialog is opened 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 923 Modbus Plus with EXECLoader Select EXEC file out the following steps to select the EXEC file Step Action 1 Press the Option button Transfer EXEC to Device
107. 1 Glossary ANY_BIT In the above version ANY_BIT covers the BOOL BYTE and WORD data types ANY_ELEM In the above version ANY ELEM covers the BOOL BYTE DINT INT REAL UDINT UINT TIME and WORD data types ANY INT In the above version ANY INT covers the DINT INT UDINT and UINT data types ANY NUM In the above version ANY NUM covers the DINT INT REAL UDINT and UINT data types ANY REAL In the above version REAL covers the REAL data type Application The window containing the workspace menu bar and the tool bar for the application Window program The name of the application program appears in the title bar An application window can contain several Document windows In Concept the application window corresponds to a Project Argument Synonymous with Actual parameters ASCII Mode The ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange mode is used to communicate with various host devices ASCII works with 7 data bits Atrium The PC based Controller is located on a standard AT board and can be operated within a host computer in an ISA bus slot The module has a motherboard requiring SA85 driver with two slots for PC104 daughter boards In this way one PC104 daughter board is used as a CPU and the other as the INTERBUS controller B Backup file The backup file is a copy of the last Source coding file The name of this backup file Concept EFB is backup c this is assuming that you never have m
108. 1 361 dialog is opened 3 Select the Discrete option button Response You return to the I O map 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example Note The modules are sometimes set with different parameters Help with this can be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog 776 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples E 6 Quantum Example Profibus DP Controller Introduction Overview What s in this section This Chapter contains the step by step process for the configuration of a Profibus DP controller with the Quantum This section contains the following topics Topic Page General Information 778 Example 7 Profibus DP Export Settings in SyCon 778 Editing Local Drop 780 Importing Profibus DP Configuration 784 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 777 Configuration examples General Information Introduction Configuring Profibus DP is done using the SyCon System Configurator software produced by Hilscher GmbH It is initially stored there as a file CNF This generated file is loaded into Concept and is visible in the I O map of the configurator Before the Profibus DP nodes max 32 can be imported a bus controller CRP 811 00 must be mapped in the drop Quantum I O Depending on the CPU selection in the Select Extensions dialog box a maximum of two to six bus controllers can be inserted
109. 14 7S time 18M TIME 19 9H t 20 4D T 25H15M time 5D14H12M18S3 5MS The network token controls the temporary possession of the transfer right via a single device The token passes round the devices in a rotating increasing address sequence All devices follow the token rotation and can receive all the possible data that is sent with it The total IEC memory consists of the IEC program memory and the global data The traffic cop is an IO map which is generated from the user IO map The traffic cop is managed in the PLC and in addition to the user IO map contains e g status information on the I O stations and modules The condition in which the control of one or more predecessor steps passes to one or more successor steps along a directed link 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 981 Glossary UDEFB UDINT UINT Unlocated variable User defined elementary functions function blocks Functions or function blocks which were created in the C programming language and which Concept provides in libraries UDINT stands for the data type unsigned double integer Entries are made as integer literal base 2 literal basis 8 literal or base 16 literal The length of the data element is 32 bits The value range for variables of this data type extends from 0 to 2exp 32 1 UINT stands for the data type unsigned integer Entries are made as integer literal base 2 literal basis 8 literal or base 16 literal The length of the
110. 287 division 289 vii Index Import 561 PLC Configuration 597 Section 568 572 583 584 585 Structured variables 590 Variables 587 590 594 general information 563 PLC configuration 596 section 569 580 variables 588 Importing INTERBUS configuration 810 Importing Profibus DP configuration 784 INI file 953 general 954 LD section settings 959 path for global DFBs 957 path for help files 957 print settings 955 project name definition 956 reading global DFBs 957 register address format settings 956 representation of internal data 959 settings for online animation 960 storage of global DFBs during upload 957 variable storage settings 956 Initial step 221 Insert FFB FBD 176 FFB LD 205 Install loadables 48 Installing the EXEC file 949 Installing the Modbus Plus driver Windows 98 2000 NT 865 Installing the SA85 Modbus Plus Presettings 860 863 Windows 98 2000 860 Windows NT 863 Instruction IL 264 265 ST 337 Instruction list 261 INTERBUS control Quantum configuration example 763 INTERBUS control with Atrium 805 INTERBUS controller 764 Atrium configuration example 804 INTERBUS export settings in CMD 805 Interface settings in Windows 95 98 2000 Modbus Presettings 874 Interface settings in Windows NT Modbus Presettings 876 Invocation DFB 302 351 FFB 302 351 354 Invoke Project 671 J Jump SFC 228 K Key combinations 679 691 692 693 695 699 705
111. 33001604 01 Concept User Manual Volume 3 840 USE 493 00 eng Version 2 5 SR2 Table of Conten ontents a Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Chapter 16 The chapters marked gray are not included in this volume About the IX General description of Concept 1 New Performance Attributes of Concept 2 5 in Comparison with Concept 2 2 19 Project 5 1 29 Creating a 1 43 PEC configuration oiu nva n ed m nis ua Rod 63 Main structure of PLC Memory and optimization Of memory csi doa d ace CR ERROR EROR aoa ok Rc s 107 Function Block language 165 Ladder Diagram 0 iiss cliche EX Gen Sees a 187 Sequence language SFC 217 Instruction list 261 Structured text eae be Baka Tue 321 Ladder Logi 984 sed eis 363 DFBs Derived Function Blocks 389 rii pase e EA EI e Pig pare 425 Variables 447 Project Browser 1x 3 4 esne wis Beane RR 459 Appendices Appendix A
112. 40 Momentum first startup for IEC with DOS 943 Momentum first startup for LL984 with DOS 946 EXEC files se ha nn oie oS hase Meee 949 Loading Firmware vier dah idee RARE Se AES ee E E 949 Settings the 953 Introduction ura ie bebe 953 General information the Concept INI file 954 INIPrint Settinigs oor cares cee Ps dl de ede Te esp eR 955 INI Settings for the Register Address Format for Variable Storage and for Defining the Project Name 956 INI Settings for Global DFBs Path Upload 957 Representation of Internal Data in the 1 959 INI Settings for the LD Section 00000 eese eese 959 INI Settings for Online Animation 5 960 a aa WK aad Gai ane A he wha ae 961 REL RS UE aa Cara we Sa a ag od a T DR Vill About the book At a Glance Document Scope Validity Note Related Documents User Comments This user manual is intended to help you create a user program with Concept It provides authoritative information on the individual program languages and on hardware configuration The documentation applies to Concept 2 5 for Micros
113. 60 20 984 X 960 30 984 X 960 30 IEC X 220 980 20 984 X 980 30 984 X 980 30 IEC X 220 Assigning the EXEC files for Momentum PLC type CPU 171 CCS 7x0 x0 171 CCS M1Vxxx M1IECxxx IEC Memory LL984 only only kByte 700 10 X 700 780 00 X 760 00 984 X 760 00 IEC X 160 The stripped EXEC of the M1 supports up to a maximum of 44 I O modules 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 951 EXEC files Loading The CTSXxxxD BIN EXEC file must be downloaded onto the CPU flash for all Firmware for Compact CPUs Compact PLC Types Loading A special EXEC file must be downloaded onto the CPU flash for each Atrium CPU Firmware for see table below Atrium PEG 180CCO EXECFile Types 121 01 AI38Vxxx BIN 241 01 AI58Vxxx BIN Note No EXEC file needs to be downloaded for the 180 ASP 26x xx SoftPL C CPU 952 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Settings in the CONCEPT INI Q Introduction Overview This chapter contains the settings that can be carried out in the CONCEPT INI file What s in this This chapter contains the following topics chapter Topic Page General information on the Concept INI file 954 INI Print Settings 955 INI Settings for the Register Address Format for Variable Storage and for 956 Defining the Project Name INI Settings for Global DFBs Path Upload 957 Representation of Internal Data in
114. 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Performance Buses Availability of the buses CPU type Performance 121 01 2M 241 01 2M 241 01 S908 4M Modbus Modbus Plus Ethernet TCP IP Ethernet SY MAX Interbus Interbus PCP loadable LL984 only Interbus PCP EFB IEC only 5908 I O Bus LonWorks Echelon MVB MultiVehicleBus available not available Block Libraries Availability of block libraries CPU type Performance 121 01 2M 241 01 2M 241 01 S908 4M AKFEFB IEC only x ANA IO IEC only x COMM IEC only CONT CTL IEC only x DIAGNO IEC only x EXPERTS IEC only x EXTENDED IEC only x FUZZY IEC only x HANDTABLEAU IEC only x IEC IEC only x 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 655 Performance Utilities Runtime System Performance CPU type 121 01 2M 241 01 2M 241 01 S908 4M LIB984 IEC only X SYSTEM IEC only X LL984 LL984 only X x available not available Availability of utilities Performance CPU type 121 01 2M 241 01 2M 241 01 S908 4M Concept DFB X Concept EFB X Concept SIM X Concept PLCSIM32 Concept Security Concept EXECLoader Concept Converter Modsoft converter Concept ModConnect x
115. 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 IEC conformity ST language elements IEC standards IEC standards table for ST language elements table Table Property Property description number number 55 1 Placing in brackets Expression 55 2 Function calls Function name list of arguments 55 3 Exponentiation 55 4 Negation 55 5 Complement NOT 55 6 Multiplication 55 7 Division 55 8 Modulo MOD 55 9 Addition 55 10 Subtraction 55 11 Comparison lt gt lt gt 55 12 Equality 55 13 Inequality lt gt 55 14 Boolean AND amp 55 15 Boolean AND AND 55 16 Boolean exclusive OR XOR 55 17 Boolean OR OR 56 1 Assignment 56 2 Function Block calls and use of FB outputs 56 4 IF instruction 56 5 CASE instruction 56 6 FOR instruction 56 7 WHILE instruction 56 8 REPEAT instruction 56 9 EXIT instruction 56 10 Empty instruction 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 721 IEC conformity Note 1 The following keywords are not available TYPE END_ TYP VAR INPUT END VAR VAR OUTPUT END VAR VAR IN OUT END VAR VAR EXTERNAL END VAR FUNCTION END FUNCTION FUNCTION BLOCK END FUNCTION BLOCK PROGRAM END PROGRAM STEP END STEP TRANSITION END TRANSITION ACTION END ACTION SEGMENT SCHEDULER RETURN Common graphic elements IEC standards IEC sta
116. 980 30 780 00 LL984 only x x x x x IEC only x x x IEC and LL984 x available not available Special Availability of special performance attributes Performance P Attributes SEU Type Performan e 700 00 76000 76010 96020 96030 700 10 78010 198020 98030 780 00 LL984 Hot Standby IEC Hot Standby Interrupt processing with HLI LL984 only Split memory LL984 only with separate software Support for the XMIT blocks x x x x LL984 only Support for XMIT EFB IEC only Support for XXMIT EFB x x x x x only Upload of the user program x x x x Support of Modbus function x x x code 42 IEC only Password protection of x x connection structure with PLC PCMCIA support 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 649 Performance CPU type Performance 700 00 76000 76010 96020 96030 700 10 78010 98020 98030 780 00 Flash memory for program and x x x x x configuration LL984 Flash memory for program and configuration IEC Remote Terminal Unit RTU configuration extension Profibus DP configuration extension Cyclical data exchange for 2 configuration extension Code generation options Include diagnosis information Code generation options Fastest code MMS Ethernet configuration extension ASCII Messages 4 x x
117. APE Specify landscape width default value at delivery 100 DY_FBD_LANDSCAPE Specify landscape height default value at delivery 50 Defining default page break values for LD sections Setting Description DX_LD_PORTRAIT Specify portrait width default value at delivery 70 DY_LD_PORTRAIT Specify portrait height default value at delivery 35 DX_LD_LANDSCAPE Specify landscape width default value at delivery 105 DY_LD_LANDSCAPE Specify landscape height default value at delivery 18 Printing SFC Sections Defining default page break values for SFC sections Setting Description DX_SFC_PORTRAIT Specify portrait width default value at delivery 11 DY_SFC_PORTRAIT Specify portrait height default value at delivery 20 DX_SFC_LANDSCAPE Specify landscape width default value at delivery 15 DY_SFC_LANDSCAPE Specify landscape height default value at delivery 11 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 955 CONCEPT INI INI Settings for the Register Address Format for Variable Storage and for Defining the Project Name Defining the Register Address Format Common Defining Variable Storage Common Determining the Permissibility of Digits in Project Names Common Specifying the register address format e g 4x reference Setting Description AddrStyle 0
118. AT CONCEPT DAT Double click on the file LOADER EXE Response The installation program for the Executive file EXEC is started 4 Select the option Communication Parameters Response The dialog box Communication setup is opened 5 Select the Modbus option Response The Modbus communication setup window is opened 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 909 Modbus with DOS Loader Define Modbus interface Protocol settings Select EXEC file Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus interface Step Action 1 Select the programming cable interface on the PC default setting is COM Select the Baudrate default is 9600 Select the parity default is EVEN AJOJN Select the Option button RTU 8 Bits for the RTU transfer mode Select the option ASCII 7 Bits for the ASCII transfer mode Select the Stop bits default is 1 Note Data transfer can only take place if you have configured the same transfer mode ASCII or RTU on the CPU using a button on the front of the module Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus protocol Step Action 1 Enter in Enter PLC Address the node address set on the CPU using a rotary switch on the back of the module 2 Select the TARGET PATH 0 option Select the ACCEPT CHANGES option Response You return to the main menu Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file
119. Appendix B B 1 Appendix C C 1 637 637 Tables of PLC dependent Performance Attributes 639 Introduction cv to eerta ede eines ER Cata s caer aged aoa neal SPs 639 Performance of 640 Performance Attributes of 645 Performance Attributes of 649 Performance Attributes of 653 Windows 659 az Anke rns wet eae i v a trix 659 ANIFICIOW nied cada deerit ener Ete s ele david Dus SUE dea dd 661 Ata E a uade ne rae 661 Window Ree bIS Gel PP dua Seber eee YU 662 Elements of a window 663 Menu commands eee rra 666 Dialog Doxes ie I ae e PIR ee ee 668 Generating a project 5 671 Online ie eR DER eee ed pen aoe ea Sacs 673 Ata Glance cu ect Ri atum dade 673 How the Online Help is 5 675 List of symbols and short cut keys 679 Ata Glance eni 679 ICOM Dal sis acini Dal e ct a eet are Menten ace iuam LR C P amulet e f Ars Ene 681 Ata Glance
120. Baudrate 12 MBaud Max Diag inputs 100 Max Diag lengths 32 Live character 3x 467 OK Cancel Help Accept the defaults as shown in the figure above or redefine them Close the dialog using OK Response You return to the CRP 811 00 Profibus DP dialog 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 787 Configuration examples Setting I O To set the I O references proceed as follows Referen Step Action 1 Select the command button Preset The Preset dialog is opened Dialog Representation Presetting assignment r Input Refs Output Refs Mix 1 0 1 1 4 1 Diag Ref 1 OK Cancel Help 2 Accept the defaults as shown in the figure above or redefine them 3 Close the dialog using OK Response You return to the CRP 811 00 Profibus DP dialog in which the defined reference ranges have automatically been entered 788 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Dialog After the I O referen
121. Common elements 712 IL AWL language elements 719 ST language elements 721 Common graphic elements 722 LD KOP language elements 723 Implementation dependent parameters 725 Error causes 728 Common elements IEC standards IEC standards table for common elements table Table Property Property description number number 1 1 For required character set see Chapter 2 1 1 of 1131 3 1 2 Lower case characters 1 3a Hash key 1 4a Dollar sign 1 5a Vertical line 1 6a Left and right square brackets 1 Upper case character and numbers 2 Upper and lower case characters numbers embedded underscore 2 3 Upper and lower case characters numbers leading and embedded underscore 3 1 Comments 712 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 IEC conformity Table Property Property description number number 4 1 Integer whole number literals 4 2 Real literals 4 3 Real literals with exponents 4 4 Base 2 literals 4 5 Base 8 literals 4 6 Base 16 literals 4 7 Boolean zero and one 4 8 Boolean FALSE and TRUE 7 1a Time span without underscores short prefix 7 1b Time span without underscores long prefix 7 2a Time span with underscores short prefix 7 20 Time span with underscores long prefix 10 1 BOOL Boolean 10 3 INT Integer 10 4 DINT Double integer 10 7
122. Cop in the dialog functionality box Select Extensions Note Since every PLC can be connected to up to 3 different Modbus Plus network segments you can setup Peer Cop for every connection separately remember Peer Cop is reduced to one segment it doesn t work through bridges 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 793 Configuration examples Peer Cop To configure a Peer Cop proceed with the following steps in 5 Step Action 1 In the window PLC Configuration with the menu command Config Extensions Peer Cop open the dialog box Peer Cop 2 Assume the default value 100 in the text field Expansion Size Note This text field is just a space of memory in words that gets reserved for future changes in offline mode that shall not cause the necessity for a complete download this is especially importent for direct application setup at a plant Select the option button Link 0 CPU in the area Go To Assume the default value 500 in the text field Health timeout msec Note The Health timeout value has the same meaning as it has in the I O map for local and remote I O 5 Select the option button Hold on timeout in the area Last value Representation of the dialog
123. DFBs 837 Macros 837 Projects 837 Converting RDE templates 489 Convertion Modsoft programs 849 CPU selection for the PLC type 73 Create DFB 405 Macro 435 Program 43 Project 43 FFB FBD 176 FFB LD 205 Creating a program IL 319 Cyclical setting of variables Reference data editor 492 D Data exchange between nodes on the Modbus Plus network 87 Data flow 207 FBD 178 Data Protection 51 Data protection in the state RAM 88 Index Data type editor 465 467 468 Comments 481 Elements 474 Short Cut Keys 693 Syntax 473 key words 475 separators 480 use of memory 482 Names 479 Declaration of variables 448 Declare Actions 241 Step properties 239 transition 246 Defining the LD contact connection settings in the INI file 959 Defining the number of LD columns fields settings in the INI file 959 Delete DFB 611 Macro 611 Project 611 Deleting memory zones from the PLC 535 Deleting PLC contents 535 Derived data type 465 467 468 Elements 474 Export 567 Syntax 473 Comments 481 Names 479 global 471 key words 475 local 471 separators 480 use of memory 482 Use 484 Derived Function Block 392 LD 198 FBD 171 DFB 389 392 archive 610 call 300 context sensitive help 403 Create 405 Delete 611 Documentation 601 FBD 171 global 394 invocation 302 351 LD 198 local 394 Protect 635 Convert 837 Diagnosis Transition diagnosis 260 Diagnostic
124. E REAL TO UDINT REAL TO UINT REAL TO WORD e TIME TO BOOL TIME TO BYTE TIME TO DINT TIME TO INT TIME TO REAL TIME TO UDINT TIME TO UINT TIME TO WORD e UDINT TO BOOL UDINT TO BYTE UDINT TO DINT UDINT TO INT UDINT TO REAL UDINT TO TIME UDINT TO UINT UDINT TO WORD e UINT TO BOOL UINT TO BYTE UINT TO DINT UINT TO INT UINT TO REAL UINT TO TIME UINT TO UDINT UINT TO WORD e WORD TO BOOL WORD TO BYTE WORD TO DINT WORD TO INT WORD TO REAL WORD TO TIME WORD TO UDINT WORD TO UINT The consequences of each conversion are described in the block library and the help texts which are available for the library of IEC standard functions The RETAIN identifier is implicitly required no language elements displayed in non buffered memory areas are supported EN and ENO are offered as standard they can however be hidden and any other input or output of data type BOOL can be used for links Expressions are restricted to individual simple Boolean variables Only available on import of IEC text form in graphical SFC representation Only available in textual declaration in IL or ST sections Initialization only possible for non Boolean outputs Declaration of field variables only possible when using previously defined field data type names 718 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 IEC conformity IL AWL language elements
125. E 493 00 September 2001 769 Configuration examples Editing Local Drop Introduction This section describes the configuration of the first local drop The processing sequence begins first of all with the definition of all drops When editing the first local drop the modules must be set with their I O references before parameters can be set forindividual modules Quantum SY MAX controller D Neo 5 P P D D V V R RII OI S UII OI 1 1 Local Quantum drop 1 2 master module 3 SY MAX drop 2 770 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Defining Drops To define drops proceed as follows in the PLC Configuration window Step Action 1 Select PLC Selection Response The PLC selection dialog is opened 2 Select the Quantum PLC family and a CPU x113 xx Using OK return to the PLC Configuration window 3 Select I O Map Response The I O Map dialog is opened and the first drop is automatically entered in the table 4 Select the Head Setup command button Response The Head Setup dialog is opened 5 Enter a 7 in RIO Slot and quit the dialog using OK Response The CRP 93x 00 module is automatically
126. Example Remote Control with DIO 754 Introduction AS dee qb ae ee a RUE 754 Editing Local Drop oru nie eran se a Yr 755 Quantum Example INTERBUS Control 763 INTRODUCTION s eth ay ete PUR alle eat date MEN RAM 763 General 1 764 Editing Local Drop zn RR 2 annA EED bes a b eed ae 765 E 5 E 6 E 7 E 8 E 9 E 10 Appendix F Appendix G G 1 G 2 Quantum Example SY MAX 769 Introduction wip a a lak ees Hates ER PER EE 769 Editing Local Drop serere RR ROVRO 770 Editing Remote Drop nen 774 Quantum Example Profibus DP Controller 777 Introductlori ceed exo act ERR ee a ERES oe eae ee saa eae 777 General 778 Example 7 Profibus DP Export Settings in 778 Editing Local Drops seine rtp una pelo b are eer aire 780 Importing Profibus DP 784 Quantum Example Peer 791 Ata glance eie as LL RM ane xb dere eens 791 Generals to Peer
127. FB this transfers the corresponding argument An input word contains information which originates from an external source and is represented by a 16 bit number A 3x register can also contain 16 sequential input bits which were read into the register in binary or BCD binary coded decimal format Note The x which follows the initial reference type number represents a five figure storage location in the user data memory i e the reference 300201 signifies an input word at the address 201 in the State RAM An input output marker bit can be used to control real output data using an output unit of the control system or to define one or more discrete outputs in the state RAM Note The x which follows the initial reference type number represents a five figure storage location in the user data memory i e the reference 000201 signifies an output or marker bit at the address 201 in the State RAM An identifier which belongs to a certain function block instance The instance name is used to clearly denote a function block within a program organization unit The instance name is automatically generated but it can be edited The instance name must be unique throughout the whole program organization unit and is not case sensitive If the name entered already exists you will be warned and you will have to choose another name The instance name must comply with the IEC name conventions otherwise an error message appears The automatically generated
128. Finish 8 Close the dialog Taskbar Properties using OK Reaction The properties dialog is closed and the project symbol is available in the selected folder 9 Start the project by clicking on the project symbol 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 671 Windows interface Generating a In this way symbols can likewise be generated for DFBs To do this select the file symbol for DFBs CCEPTDFB EXE in step 4 and add the DFB name and path instead of the project name and path to the command line in step 5 672 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Windows interface B 5 Online help At a Glance Overview This section describes use of online help What s in this This section contains the following topics ion section Topic Page At a Glance 674 How the Online Help is set out 675 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 673 Windows interface At a Glance General information Starting the online help The online help is used to quickly and easily obtain information about the task being performed the use of an unfamiliar command or the functions Function Blocks and modules The online help is available throughout Concept Note The option Use polygon acceleration may not be used if the graphics card has hardware acceleration functions Use of these may still lead to the graphics in the online help being incomplete A detailed description of how to switch off the acceler
129. I O 800 I O LonWorks A120 I O x x x x x available not available Buses Availability of the buses CPU type Performance 258 512k 265 512k 275 512k 285 1M Modbus x x x x Modbus Plus using x x x BridgeModul e Ethernet TCP IP using using using using BridgeModul BridgeModul BridgeMod BridgeModul e e ule e Ethernet SY MAX Interbus using BKF using BKF using BKF using BKF XXX XXX XXX XXX 646 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Performance Performance CPU type 258 512k 265 512k 275 512k 285 1M Interbus PCP loadable LL984 only Interbus PCP EFB IEC only LonWorks Echelon MVB MultiVehicleBus x available not available Block Libraries Availability of block libraries Performance CPU type 258 512k 265 512k 275 512k 285 1M AKFEFB IEC only X X X X ANA IO IEC only X X X X COMM IEC only X X X CONT CTL IEC only DIAGNO IEC only EXPERTS IEC only EXTENDED IEC only FUZZY IEC only HANDTABLEAU IEC only IEC IEC only LIB984 IEC only SYSTEM IEC only LL984 LL984 only x available not available Utilities Availability of utilities Performance CPU type 258 512k 265 512k 275 512k 285 1M
130. IEC Use OK return to the PLC Configuration window 3 Select I O Map Response The I O Map dialog is opened and the first drop is automatically entered in the table 4 Select the last line in the table Select the Insert command button Response The second drop is entered in the Type column Note Only one I O bus can be configured Dialog display VO Map Reserve for expansion 144 4 Paste Delete Drop Type Supervision in bits Outbits Status Edi 1 Momentum 1 0 0 0 ED 0 0 OK Cancel Help 5 Select the drop from the Drop column Select the Edit command button Response You reach the module map 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 815 Configuration examples Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the Local Modules and Quantum Drop dialog Specifying I O Step Action References 1 Select the Module column Response The I O Module Selection dialog is opened 2 From the Category column select the all option Response All modules are listed in the Modules column 3 Select from the column Modules the moduleAAI 030 00 Exit the dialog with OK Response The module is inserted in the I O map 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example see Local Momentum drop 5 In the In Ref and Out R
131. Micro H H P will always be lost after loading a new Executive Would you like to continue Y N N is displayed 2 Acknowledge the warning with Y Response The message Node failed to enter normal mode appears 3 The DOWNLOAD PROGRESS window appears which shows the transfer rate Response After the transfer is complete the message Download Operation Successful appears 4 Confirm the message with RETURN Response You return to the main menu 5 Select the Exit Program option Response The DOS Loader is exited Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project p 43 software connection Note If you recieve an error message close Concept and start the BDRESET EXE file in the Concept directory to reset the SA85 Then start again from the first step 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 939 Modbus Plus with DOS Loader Atrium first startup with DOS Loader Introduction This section describes the first startup of Atrium when used with Modbus Plus The hardware requirements for loading EXEC files can be seen in the Modicon TSX Atrium manual The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections e Start DOS Loader p 940 Define SA85 adapter p 940 Protocol settings p 941 Select EXEC file p 941 Load EXEC file p 942 Start DOS Loader procedure for launching DOS Loaders is as follows Step Action 1 If the CPU display Run is lit stop the program with Concept
132. OL v 000161 000176 UINT8 v 300019 300024 UINT8 v 300025 300030 192 170 ADI 740 50 16DI 230V AC UINT8 v 6 300031 300036 208 BOOL w 000177 000192 170 ARM 370 30 10DI 8DO 12 UINT8 v 6 300037 300042 464 BOOL v 000193 000448 170 ADM 540 80 Modbus Gate UINT8 v 6 300043 300048 480 170 ADI 340 00 1601 24 V DC w 4 OK Cancel Help Poll 790 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples E 7 Quantum Example Peer Cop At a glance Introduction In this chapter the configuration of Peer Cop is described step by step What s in this This section contains the following topics section Topic Page Generals to Peer Cop 792 Configuration of Peer Cop 793 Global data transfer 795 Specific data transfer 797 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 791 Configuration examples Generals to Peer Cop Introduction To pass Routing Paths Peer Cop is a data exchange service provided by the Modbus Plus network As an overview imagine that every Modbus Plus network segment max 64 nodes has a global memory i e a certain number of global variables can be read by every node connected to the same segment The total amount of global variables depends on the number of connected and active nodes every node can provide up to 32 words 16 bit to the global memory Only the 32 words provided by a node can be written by the same node all
133. PLC configuration 596 Exporting located variables 457 Expressions ST 324 Extended memory 121 F Factory Link 594 FBD 165 Actual parameters 173 animation 181 Calling a macro 444 code generation 180 data flow 177 178 Derived Function Blocks 171 DFB 171 EFB 169 Elementary Function 169 Elementary Function Block 170 EN 172 ENO 172 execution order 177 FFB 169 Function 169 Function Block 170 Icon bar 683 link 172 loop 178 online functions 181 program creation 184 Short Cut Keys 695 Text Object 174 UDEFB 172 User defined Elementary Function 172 User defined Elementary Function Block 172 FFB Call 308 call 300 change FBD 177 change LD 206 create FBD 176 create LD 205 FBD 169 insert FBD 176 insert LD 205 invocation 302 351 354 LD 196 position 176 205 replace FBD 177 replace LD 206 Function FBD 169 LD 196 Function Block FBD 170 LD 197 Function Block language 165 G General 1 General information 814 Loading a project 547 Online functions 517 Select process information 543 connect PLC 519 INTERBUS Controller 764 INTERBUS Controller with Atrium 805 Profibus DP Controller 778 vi Index General information about configuration in OFFLINE and ONLINE mode 69 General information about hardware configuration 65 General information about the online control panel 533 General information about the PLC configuration 66 General info
134. Programming modes LL984 387 Programs 34 Project Create 43 Delete 611 Documentation 601 Invoke 671 Open 671 Protect 635 Structure 29 archive 610 processing 30 structure 30 Project Browser 459 Keyboard operation 462 Mouse operation 462 Project name definition settings in the INI file 956 Project symbol Generate 671 Projects Convert 837 Protect DFB 635 Project 635 Q Quantum INTERBUS controller 765 Quantum Peer Cop 792 793 795 797 Quantum Profibus DP controller 780 Quantum remote controller with DIO 755 759 Quantum remote controller with RIO 736 Quantum remote controller with RIO series 800 744 Quantum SY MAX controller 770 Quantum Configuration example Peer Cop 791 INTERBUS control 763 Profibus DP controller 777 remote control with DIO 754 remote control with RIO 735 Remote control with RIO series 800 743 SY MAX controller 769 Quantum first startup DOS Loader 900 934 EXECLoader 880 914 Modbus 880 900 Modbus Plus 914 934 Quantum Profibus DP controller 784 R RDE 487 converting RDE templates 489 Cyclical setting of variables 492 general information 488 RDE editor toolbar 690 Reactivate flash save 539 Reading global DFBs settings in the INI file 957 Reference data editor 487 Changing signal states of a Located variable 491 Cyclical setting of variables 492 Replacing variable names 497 converting RDE templates 489 general infor
135. R Move to the right 25 3 ROR Rotate to the right 25 4 ROL Rotate to the left 26 5 AND LLogical And 26 6 OR Logical Or 26 7 XOR Logical exclusive Or 26 8 NOT Negation 27 1 SEL Binary selection 27 2a MAX Extendable maximum 27 2b MIN Extendable minimum 27 3 LIMIT Limit 27 4 MUX Extendable multiplexer 28 5 GT Falling sequence 28 6 GE Monotonic sequence decreasing 28 7 EQ Equality 28 8 LE Monotonic sequence increasing 28 9 LT Rising seqence 28 10 NE Inequality 30 1 ADD Adding TIME to TIME 30 4 SUB Subtracting TIME from TIME 30 10 MUL Multiplying TIME by ANY_NUM 30 11 DIV Dividing TIME by ANY_NUM 33 1 RETAIN identifier for internal variables Note 5 p 718 33 2 RETAIN identifier for output variables Note 5 p 718 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 715 IEC conformity Table Property Property description number number 33 3 RETAIN identifier for internal Function Blocks Note 5 p 718 34 1 Bistable Function Block set priority 34 2 Bistable Function Block reset priority 35 1 Detecting the rising edge 35 2 Detecting the falling edge 36 1 Up counter 36 2 Down counter 36 3 Up Down counter 37 1 TP Pulse timer 37 2a TON Switch on delay 37 3a TOF Switch off delay 39 1 RETAIN identifier for internal variables Note 5 p 778 39 2 RETAIN identifier for output variables Not
136. Response Ready lit Run slow flashing Modbus lit with some interruptions Modbus 3x flashes with interruptions CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows transter LED Response Ready lit Run not lit Modbus not lit Modbus 3x flashes with interruptions Note The three flash sequence Modbus display idicates that no communication is present on the bus This is displayed on Modbus by a non lit Modbus display The Modbus display is lit again once connection is made with Concept Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project p 43 software connection 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 887 Modbus with EXECLoader Momentum first startup for IEC with EXECLoader Introduction Start EXECLoader This section describes the first startup of Momentum for IEC when used with Modbus The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections Start EXECLoader p 888 Define Modbus interface p 889 Protocol settings p 890 Select EXEC file p 891 Load EXEC file p 891 The procedure for launching EXECLoaders is as follows Step Action 1 Open the Concept start menu Response All installed Concept programs are displayed as symbols Click on the symbol with the identifier EXECLoader Response The EXECLoader program is started Click on the command Next as soon as you have read the information
137. Select EXEC file out the following steps to select the EXEC file Step Action 1 Select the option File Selection Response The File Selection window is opened Click on the BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired programming language See the table Loading Firmware for Quantum PLC Types p 950 Confirm your selection with RETURN Response You return to the main menu Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM Step Action 1 Select the option Load File To PLC Response The Loading Process window is opened and the warning The PROGRAM contents of the device being loaded could be lost after loading a new Executive The CONTENTS stored in the Micro H H P will always be lost after loading a new Executive Would you like to continue Y N N is displayed Acknowledge the warning with Y Response The message Node failed to enter normal mode appears The DOWNLOAD PROGRESS window appears which shows the transfer rate Response After the transfer is complete the message Download Operation Successful appears Confirm the message with RETURN Response You return to the main menu Select the Exit Programoption Response The DOS Loader is exited 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 901 Modbus with DOS Loader CPU display during transfer CPU display after transfer Cre
138. September 2001 743 Configuration examples Editing Local Drop Introduction This section describes the configuration of the first local drop The processing sequence begins first of all with the definition of all drops When editing the first local drop the modules must be set with their I O references before parameters can be set forindividual modules Quantum remote controller with RIO Series 800 2 8 MN A Y D i C C DID A AI C CIDIDAIA BUB d PIPID D V VIR R IDD vivvo 8818 vo siulI Joli Alt loi fo S908 S908 Local Quantum drop 1 RIO master module RIO slave module RIO drop 2 Adapter module o a A o N RIO drop 3 with series 800 modules 744 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Defining Drops To define drops proceed as follows in the PLC Configuration window Step Action 1 Select PLC Selection Response The PLC selection dialog is opened 2 Select the Quantum PLC family and a CPU x113 xx Using OK return to the PLC Configuration window 3 Select I O Map Response The I O Map dialog is opened and the first drop is automatically entered in the table 4 Select the Head Setup command button Response The Head Setup dialog is opened 5 Enter a 7 in RIO Slot and quit the dialog using OK Response The CRP 93x 00 modul
139. Support for XMIT x x x x x x loadable LL984 only Support for XMIT EFB amp IEC only Support for XXMIT EFB x x x X IEC only Upload of the user x x x program Support of the Modbus x x x x function codes 42 IEC only Password protection of P 5 T X connection structure with PLC PCMCIA support 3 Flash memory for x x program and configuration Remote Terminal Unit RTU configuration extension Profibus DP configuration x x x x extension Cyclical data exchange x x x x for configuration extension x Code generation options Include diagnosis information 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 641 Performance CPU type Performance 11302 11303 21304 4240x 43412 53414 Code generation options x Fastest code MMS Ethernet x x x x configuration extension ASCII Messages x x x x x Peer Cop x x x x x x RIO Remote I O x x x x x x DIO Distributed I O x x x x x SYMAX I O x x x x x 800 I O x x x x x LonWorks x x x x A120 I O x available not available Buses Availability of the buses CPU type Performance 11302 11303 21304 4240x 43412 53414 Modbus x x x X x x Modbus Plus x x
140. Transfer rate 100 0 MBit s r Activity mn Sent m Received L E Packages 756 559 Properties Deactivate Close 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 829 Configuration examples Step Action 3 Select the Properties command button Response The LAN Connection Properties dialog box is opened Dialog display LAN Connection Properties General Establish connection using 3Com 3C918 integrated Fast Ethernet Controller 3C905B Configure Activated components are used by this connection K Client for Microsoft networks K File and printer enabling for Microsoft networks X Internet Protocol TCP IP Install Uninstall Properties r Description TCP IP the standard protocol for WAN networks which allow data to be exchanged over different connected networks Show icon in the task bar when connected OK Cancel 4 Select the network connection Internet Protocol TCP IP 830 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Step Action Select the Properties command button Response The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box is opened Dialog display Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General IP settings can be assigned automatically if the
141. UINT Signed integer 10 8 UDINT Signed double integer 10 10 REAL Floating point number 10 12 TIME Time span 10 17 BYTE Bit sequence 8 10 18 WORD Bit sequence 16 12 4 Data types for fields 12 5 Data types for structures 15 1 I Input Note 1 p 717 15 2 Q Output Note 2 p 717 15 4 X Bit size Note 2 p 717 Note 1 p 717 15 5 no prefix Bit size Note 2 p 717 Note 1 p 717 15 6 B Byte size Note 2 p 717 Note 1 p 717 15 7 W Word size Note 2 p 717 Note 1 p 717 15 8 D Double word size Note 2 p 717 Note 1 p 717 17 2 Declaration of directly displayed buffered variables Note 5 p 718 Note 9 p 718 17 3 Declaration of storage locations with symbolic variables Note 5 p 718 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 713 IEC conformity Table Property Property description number number 17 4 Assignment of storage locations with fields Note 5 p 718 Note 11 p 718 17 5 Automatic storage allocation for symbolic variables Note 5 p 718 17 7 Declaration for buffered fields Note 5 p 718 Note 11 p 718 17 Declaration for structured variables Note 5 p 718 18 Initialization of directly displayed buffered variables Note 5 p 718 Note 9 p 718 Note 10 p 718 18 3 Assignment of storage locations and start values for fields Note 5 p 718 18 4 Assignment
142. ailability of IEC and LL984 support Support CPU type Performance 121 01 2M 241 01 4M 241 01 S908 4M LL984 only 7 IEC only Stripped Exec IEC and LL984 X x available not available 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 653 Performance Special Availability of special performance attributes Performance Attributes Performance m 241 01 4M 241 01 S908 4M LL984 Hot Standby IEC Hot Standby Interrupt processing with HLI LL984 only Split memory LL984 only with separate software Support for XMIT loadable LL984 only Support for XMIT EFB IEC only Support for XXMIT IEC only 121 01 2M 241 01 4M x 241 01 S908 4M Upload of the user program x Support of Modbus function code 42 IEC only Password protection of connection structure with PLC PCMCIA support Flash memory for program and configuration s Remote Terminal Unit RTU configuration extension Profibus DP configuration extension Cyclical data exchange for configuration extension Code generation options Include diagnosis information Code generation options Fastest code MMS Ethernet configuration extension ASCII Messages Peer Cop x RIO Remote I O DIO Distributed I O x SYMAX I O 800 I O LonWorks A120 I O x available not available 654
143. al modules proceed as follows in the Local TSX ization of Compact Drop dialog Modulos Step Action 1 From the Rack Slot column select line 1 3 Response The 1 3 text box has a dark background i e the MVB258A module has been selected for editing Note The CPU module is not parameterized Select the Params command button Response The AS BMVB258A dialog is opened Select the Select command button Response The Select MVB Import File dialog is opened Set the path of the parameterization file generated in the TCN tool and exit the dialog using OK Response The selected parameterization file is displayed in the text box in the AS BMVB258A dialog Select the Do Import command button Response The project data of the parameterization file is transferred to Concept and displayed in the lower list box Dialog Representation AS BMVB258A Select Start import Project test Traffic Store examp tool Version 7 SW Version 1 Generation Date 24 12 96 Device address 157 001 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 a 009 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 017 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 025 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 v OK Cancel Help Exit the dialog using OK Repeat steps 1 to 2 for all the modules in the example Note The modules are sometim
144. alog box Loading The Quantum CPUs not ending in X or S can be used for the LL984 Hot Standby Firmware for Quantum LL984 Hot Standby Operation operation A special EXEC file must be downloaded onto the CPU for this The loadable for LL984 Hot Standby 208 DAT is automatically installed by the system 950 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 EXEC files Loading Firmware for Quantum IEC Hot Standby Operation Loading Firmware for Quantum Equation Editor Loading Firmware for Momentum PLC Types The CPUs 140 CPU 434 12 and 140 CPU 534 14 can also be used for IEC Hot Standby A special EXEC file must be downloaded onto the CPU for this The loadables for IEC Hot Standby IHSB196 EXE and CHS_208 DAT are automatically installed by the system The Quantum CPUs not ending in X or S can be used for the LL984 equation editor A special EXEC file must be downloaded onto the CPU flash for this This EXEC file is not part of the Concept delivery range but can be obtained via the internet at www schneiderautomation com Assigning the EXEC files for Momentum PLC type CPU 171 CCC 7x0 x0 171 CCC M1Vxxx M1IECxxx IEC Memory LL984 only only kByte 760 10 984 X 760 10 IEC X 256 780 10 984 X 780 10 IEC X 256 Assigning the EXEC files for Momentum PLC type CPU 171 CCC 9x0 x0 171 CCC M1EVxxx M1EWIxxx IEC Memory LL984 only only kByte 9
145. ame Bridge MB Index 127 0 0 1 v IEC Simulator 32 Bit Access List of nodes in Modbus Plus network ObDisplay only O Change data Change program O Change Configuration v Host adapter OK Cancel Update lt Back Forward gt Help Exit the dialog using OK 836 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Convert Projects DFBs Macros Converting projects DFBs At a Glance The four main steps for converting projects DFBs are as follows Step Action 1 Exporting projects DFBs macros within the earlier version of Concept see Exporting project DFB macro earlier version of Concept p 838 For information on installing the new version of Concept see nstalling new versions of Concepts p 839 For information on importing projects DFBs macros see Importing project DFB macro p 839 For information on editing projects DFBs macros see Editing the project DFB macro p 839 Converting EFBs CAUTION Risk of losing data If user defined EFBs are being used in the project EFBs which have been created manually the current version of the EFB toolkit must be used to convert them File gt Concept library The Concept converter is not able to convert user defined EFBs Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 840
146. ams Exceptions Description Ox and 1x references in a Modsoft program are converted to a Located Variable with data type BOOL in Concept This data type is compatible with the use of these references However 3x and 4x are converted to integer Note This straight conversion precludes both Modsoft bit defination and floating point types Example If you have the following defined in Modsoft REF BIT SYMBOL DESCRIPTOR 000001 located_Ox_boolean located Ox boolean descriptor 100001 located 1x boolean located 1x boolean descriptor 300001 6 bit 16 of 3000001 16th bit of 300001 descriptor 400100 incoming integer incoming integer descriptor 400200 outgoing interger outgoing flt82 descriptor 400300 1 bit_1_of_400300 bit 1 of 400300 descriptor A conversion of the above to Concept using the Convert program yields Variable Name Data Type Address Comment located Ox boolean BOOL 000001 located Ox boolean descriptor located 1x boolean BOOL 100001 located 1x boolean descriptor bit 16 of 3000001 INT 300001 16th bit of 300001 descriptor incoming integer INT 400100 incoming integer descriptor outgoing interger INT 400200 outgoing 32 descriptor bit 1 of 400300 INT 400300 bit 1 of 400300 descriptor 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 853 Convertion of Modsoft Programs 854 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modsoft and 984 References
147. and is currently unavailable One or more other commands must be executed before the desired button can be used e unpressed The command can be selected e pressed The command is active Status bar The appearance of the status bar depends on whether the project is open and the programming language used in the section In the first part of the status bar various information is displayed depending on the selected object e f a dialog box is open or a menu command or button has been selected some help will be given about it To display the help select a menu command or a button with the left mouse button and hold it down A short description of the menu command or button appears in the status bar To execute the menu command button release the mouse button If execution of the menu command button is not required move the pointer away from the active area the description in the status bar disappears and then release the mouse button e lfan FFB aparameterto an input output a step or a transition has been selected a comment about the selected object is displayed With parameters and transitions the assigned direct address only in case of located variables is also displayed 664 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Windows interface The second part of the status bar status of the active section indicates whether the section is in animation mode or the section is disabled ANIMATED The section is animated INHIBITED The section is
148. and or other derived data types The definition of derived data types is found in the Concept data type editor A distinction is made between global data types and local data types A derived function block represents the invocation of a derived function block type Details of the graphic form of the invocation can be found in the Functional block instance In contrast to the invocation of EFB types invocations of DFB types are denoted by double vertical lines on the left and right hand side of the rectangular block symbol The body of a derived function block type is designed using FBD language LD language ST language IL language however this is only the case in the current version of the programming system Furthermore derived functions can not yet be defined in the current version A distinction is made between local and global DFBs 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 965 Glossary Device Address DFB Code DFB instance data DINT Direct Representation Document Window DP PROFIBUS Dummy DX Zoom The device address is used to uniquely denote a network device in the routing path The address is set on the device directly e g using the rotary switch on the back of the modules The DFB code is the section s DFB code which can be executed The size of the DFB code is mainly dependant upon the number of blocks in the section The DFB instance data is internal data from the derived function block used i
149. and short cut keys General icon bar Symbols The table below shows the available symbols and their corresponding menu entry commands Symbol Menu entry command executed File Open File New section New DFB section File Section open File Save Project Variable declaration Project Search em Online Online control B Online Download changes v Edit Reverse Delete Edit Edit Copy Edit Insert 682 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 List of symbols and short cut keys Icon bar in the FBD editor Symbols The table shows the additional icons available in the FBD editor and the corresponding menu entry commands see also General icon bar p 682 Symbol Menu entry command executed View Enlarge View Reduce Objects Select mode Objects Link Objects FFB Last Type Objects Invert Input Output Objects Text Objects Select FFB Online Animate selection zies 3 E E Em le L9 Online Animate binary values 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 683 List of symbols and short cut keys Icon bar in the SFC Editor Symbols The table shows the additional icons available in the SFC editor and the corresponding menu entry commands see also Ge
150. ap 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example see Local Quantum Drop dialog representation 5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns set the start references for the input and output modules Note Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 e g 100001 Coil References have the prefix 0 e g 000001 Input Register References have the prefix 3 e g 300001 and Output Register References have the prefix 4 e g 400001 Response The end reference column In End or Out End of the available address range is automatically entered Dialog display Following module mapping and I O reference specification the dialog looks like this RIO I O Bus Drop Drop Module Modules 1 Input bits 80 D Input bits 80 Used I O points 80 Output bits80 Params Output bits 80 Status table Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste No Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description 1 AMM 090 00 300009 300013 400003 400007 Analog 4 Ch 4 20 2 n 3 v OK Cancel Help Poll Note With this addressing the 4 measurements of the AMM 090 00 are to be 400013 found in the words 300009 300013 The parameters are in the words 400009 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 819 Configuration examples Set Module To set parameters for the module proceed as follows in the
151. ar Cursor Keys In selection mode if there is no selected object where the cursor is the cursor moves and a selection rectangle is displayed If a selected objectis in the cursor position all objects will be shifted according to how the cursor is moved The number of inputs of an FFB with a variable input number can be changed in the FB Editor s Selection Mode by placing the cursor on the rectangle in the middle of the lower edge of the selection frame which holds down the Space bar and presses the Up or Down keys The width of the branches or connections can be changed in the SFC Editor s Selection Mode by placing the cursor on the rectangle of the selection frame which holds down the Space bar and presses the Right or Left keys In Link Mode a link is produced by dragging the mouse 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 697 List of symbols and short cut keys Allocating variables onto an FFB Changing variables onto an FFB Changing the Key Function Shift key Space bar Cursor keys described above and the selection of all other objects is retained In Selection Mode this key combination creates a selection frame as To allocate variables onto an FFB do the following Step Action 1 Use the cursor keys or Shift cursor keys to move the cursor to the input output of the FFB 2 Press Enter Reaction The link FFB dialog for the selected input output opens To c
152. are significant in identifiers e g A_BCD AB CD are interpreted as two separate identifiers Several leading and multiple successive underscores are not allowed Identifiers should not contain any spaces No differentiation is made between upper and lower case e g ABCD and abcd are interpreted as the same identifier Identifiers should not be Keywords IEC Program The IEC memory consists of the program code EFB code the section data and the Memory DFB instance data IIR Filter Infinite Impulse Response Filter a filter with infinite impulse answer Initial step The first step in a sequence A step must be defined as an initial step for each sequence The sequence is started with the initial step when first invoked Initial value The value which is allocated to a variable when the program is started The values are assigned in the form of literals 970 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Glossary Input bits 1x references Input parameter Input Input words 3x references Input output marker bits 0x references Instance Name Instancing The 1 0 status of the input bits is controlled via the process data which reaches from an input device to the CPU Note The x which follows the initial reference type number represents a five figure storage location in the user data memory i e the reference 100201 signifies an output or marker bit at the address 201 in the State RAM Upon invocation of a F
153. ary A Active Window Actual Parameters Addresses ANL_IN ANL_OUT ANY The window which is currently selected Only one window can be active at any given time When a window is active the color of the title bar changes so that it is distinguishable from the other windows Unselected windows are inactive Current connected Input Output Parameters Direct addresses are memory ranges in the PLC They are located in the State RAM and can be assigned Input Output modules The display entry of direct addresses is possible in the following formats e Standard Format 400001 e Separator Format 4 00001 e Compact format 4 1 e IEC Format QW1 ANL_IN stands for the Analog Input data type and is used when processing analog values The 3x References for the configured analog input module which were specified in the I O component list are automatically assigned data types and should therefore only be occupied with Unlocated Variables ANL OUT stands for the Analog Output data type and is used when processing analog values The 3x References for the configured analog input module which were specified in the I O component list are automatically assigned data types and should therefore only be occupied with Unlocated Variables In the above version ANY covers the BOOL BYTE DINT INT REAL UDINT UINT TIME and WORD elementary data types and related Derived Data Types 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 96
154. ast flashing Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project p 43 software Note If you recieve an error message close Concept and start the BDRESET EXE file in the Concept directory to reset the SA85 Then start again from the first step 948 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 EXEC files Loading Firmware At a Glance You obtain the PLC types of the different firmware by loading the EXEC files BIN 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 949 EXEC files Loading Firmware for Quantum PLC Assigning the EXEC files Types 140 CPU Q186Vxxx Q486Vxxx Q58VxxxD Q5RVxxxD QIECVxxx IEC Memory IEC LL984 IEC LL984 IEC LL984 IEC LL984 only kByte 113 02 X LL984 only 113 028 X max 150 113 02X X LL984 only 113 03 X 2 E max 136 113 03S X max 379 113 03X X 2 136 213 04 X E 5 305 213 045 X max 610 213 04X X 5 max 305 424 0x X s max 465 424 OxX X max 465 434 12 X E 890 534 14 X 5 max 2550 434 12A X 890 Redesigned CPU 534 14A X max 2550 Redesigned CPU Note After the QIECVxxx BIN EXEC file is loaded the EMUQ EXE loadable must be loaded in Concept in the Loadables PLC Configuration Loadables di
155. at no communication is present on the bus This is displayed on Modbus by a non lit COM ACT display The COM ACT display is lit again once connection is made with Concept Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project p 43 software connection 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 897 Modbus with EXECLoader 898 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Startup when using Modbus with DOS Loader M Introduction Overview This chapter describes loading executive data EXEC onto the PLC with the DOS Loader program What s in this This chapter contains the following topics chapter Topic Page Quantum first startup with DOS Loader 900 Compact first startup with DOS Loader 903 Momentum first startup for IEC with DOS Loader 906 Momentum first startup for LL984 with DOS Loader 909 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 899 Modbus with DOS Loader Quantum first startup with DOS Loader Introduction Start DOS Loader Define Modbus This section describes the first startup of Quantum when used with Modbus The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections e Start DOS Loader p 900 Define Modbus interface p 900 Protocol settings p 901 Select EXEC file p 901 Load EXEC file p 901 The procedure for launching DOS Loaders is as follows Step Action 1 If the CPU display Run is lit stop the program with Concept in main menu
156. ata types are only available in a single Concept project and the local DFBs and are placed in the DFB directory under the project directory Local DFBs are only available in a single Concept project and are placed in the DFB directory under the project directory The local network is the network which connects the local nodes with other nodes either directly or through bus repeaters Local macros are only available in a single Concept project and are placed in the DFB directory under the project directory The local node is the one which is currently being configured A state RAM address reference addresses Ox 1x 3x 4x is allocated to located variables The value of these variables is saved in the state RAM and can be modified online using the reference data editor These variables can be addresses using their symbolic names or their reference addresses All inputs and outputs of the PLC are connected to the state RAM The program can only access peripheral signals attached to the PLC via located variables External access via Modbus or Modbus Plus interfaces of the PLC e g from visualization systems is also possible via located variables 974 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Glossary Macro MMI Multi element Macros are created with the help of the Concept DFB software Macros are used to duplicate frequently used sections and networks including their logic variables and variable declaration A distinction
157. ating the software connection During transfer the CPU display is as follows LED Response Ready lit Run slow flashing Modbus lit with some interruptions Modbus 3x flashes with interruptions After transfer the CPU display is as follows LED Response Ready lit Run not lit Modbus not lit Modbus 3x flashes with interruptions Note The three flash sequence Modbus display idicates that no communication is present on the bus This is displayed on Modbus by a non lit Modbus display The Modbus display is lit again once connection is made with Concept Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project p 43 902 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus with DOS Loader Compact first startup with DOS Loader Introduction This section describes the first startup of Compact when used with Modbus The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections e Start DOS Loader p 903 Define Modbus interface p 903 Protocol settings p 904 Select EXEC file p 904 Load EXEC file p 904 Start DOS Loader procedure for launching DOS Loaders is as follows Step Action 1 If the CPU display Run is lit stop the program with Concept in main menu Online Response The Run display is no longer lit the Ready is now lit Open the directory DAT CONCEPT DAT Double click on the fi
158. ation function will be found in the graphics card s user manual There are several methods of calling up the online help Invoking the contents There are two methods of invoking the online help contents e invoke the online help contents select the menu command Help gt Contents e Inthe program group Concept open the help symbol Help with the execution of a menu command There are two methods of invoking help with a menu command e using the mouse To obtain an explanation select the menu command with the left mouse button hold down the mouse button press F1 and then release the mouse button e using the keyboard To obtain an explanation of a menu command select it and then press F1 Help with a dialog There are two methods of invoking help with a dialog e To obtain an explanation of a dialog click on the command button Help in the dialog itself e To obtain an explanation of a dialog press F1in the dialog itself Help with operating an EFB To obtain an explanation of the operation of the EFB click on the command button Help with type within the dialog with the EFB properties Help with the operation of a module In the dialog I O module selection click on the command button Help with module to obtain an explanation of the operation of a module 674 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Windows interface How the Online Help is set out Introduction If you start the online help the
159. ation und Kommunikation e V Magdeburg SteinfeldstraBe 3 D 39179 Barleben Notes The following points must be considered with regard to the conformity of the import interface e n Concept IL operators are permitted as identifiers R S LD S1 and R1 are possible parameter names Therefore there will be no changes made to the standard functions function blocks Concept requires no change in the IEC table 54 with S to SET R to RESET S1 to SET1 R1 to RESET1 e All IL operators not in conflict with functions are permitted as variable names Concept S S1 R1 CLK CU CD PV IN PT contrary to IEC table 54 e Counter EFBs must be typified in Concept e g CTU must become CTU INT e Function block instances cannot be called up more than once a restriction that is self evident if IEC table 53 property 3 is required e An overflow of time span variables e g t 100s is not detected The system calculates the time correctly so that detection of an overflow is not necessary e IEC IL comments are only permitted as the last element in a line Concept allows comments to be made everywhere 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 711 IEC conformity D 2 IEC standards tables At a Glance Overview This system fulfils the requirements of the IEC 1131 3 in the following properties of the language What s in this This section contains the following topics ion section Toplc Page
160. ay contain further popups The popup window is cleared by re clicking on it or pressing any key This does not replace the present help text 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 677 Windows interface 678 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 List of symbols and short cut keys C At a Glance Description Each editor and the PLC configuration have their own list of symbols available This facilitates access to frequently used functions It is also possible to call up many functions with short cut keys instead of menu commands What s in this This chapter contains the following Sections 2 chapter Section Topic Page C 1 Icon bar 681 C 2 Short cut keys 691 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 679 List of symbols and short cut keys 680 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 List of symbols and short cut keys C 1 Icon bar At a Glance Description This section describes the icon bar icons In the icon bars there are editor independent and editor dependent icons What s in this This section contains the following topics section Topic Page General icon bar 682 Icon bar in the FBD editor 683 Icon bar in the SFC Editor 684 Icon bar in the LD editor 686 List of Symbols in the IL and ST Editor 687 List of Symbols in the LL984 Editor 688 Icons in PLC Configuration 689 Toolbar in the RDE Editor 690 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 681 List of symbols
161. ber 2001 937 Modbus Plus with DOS Loader Protocol settings Select EXEC file Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus Plus protocol settings Step Action 1 Enter in Enter First Routing Path the node address set on the CPU using a rotary switch on the back of the module Confirm the entry with RETURN Response The option Enter second Routing Path appears Acknowledge the option with RETURN Response The window for selecting the TARGET PATH appears Select the TARGET PATH 1 option Enter in Enter Software Interrupt gt the Interrupt 5c or 5d selected in the CONFIG SYS file Select the ACCEPT CHANGES option Response You return to the main menu Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file Step Action 1 Select the option File Selection Response The File Selection window is opened 2 Select the BIN file CTSX201D Confirm your selection with RETURN Response You return to the main menu 938 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus Plus with DOS Loader Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM Step Action 1 Select the option Load File To PLC Response The Loading Process window is opened and the warning The PROGRAM contents of the device being loaded could be lost after loading a new Executive The CONTENTS stored in the
162. bes the configuration of the third remote drop The drop has already been defined in Editing the First local Drop See Editing Local Drop p 744 To edit the third remote drop the modules must be specified with their I O references before the individual modules can be parameterized Note The J890 adapter module must be mounted in the rack of the third drop However this module is not visible either in the software or in the dialogs Quantum remote controller with RIO Series 800 2 9 0 oY os A CC DID A A C cibo ala sss P P D D v v R RID D V V lO 8 8 V0 S 01 loli OIP All loll Jo aleve 908 908 1 Local Quantum drop 1 RIO master module RIO slave module RIO drop 2 Adapter module o a A5 WO ND RIO drop 3 with series 800 modules 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 751 Configuration examples Mapping Modules and Specifying I O References To map the modules and specify the address ranges go to the RIO slot 7 800 drop 3 dialog and proceed as follows Step Action 1 Select the Module column Response The I O Module Selection dialog is opened From the Category column select the all option Response All modules are listed in the Modules column In the Modules column select the B810 module Exit the dialog with OK Response The module is inserted in the
163. bus bridge Press the appropriate Option button for your system PLC Local Head Remote Drop Click on the command button Next Response The Operation dialog is opened 926 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus Plus with EXECLoader Select EXEC file out the following steps to select the EXEC file Step Action 1 Press the Option button Transfer EXEC to Device 2 Click on the command button Browse Response The Concept directory is opened in a standard window Double click on the DAT directory Response All available BIN files are displayed Click on the BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired programming language See the table Loading Firmware for Momentum PLC Types p 951 Response The selected BIN file is displayed in File name text field Click on the command button Open Response You return to the dialog Operation and the path to the selected BIN file is displayed in the Filename text field Click on the command button Next Response The dialog File and Device Info is opened Information is provided here about the selected BIN file and also about the PLC Click on the command button Next Response The Summary dialog is opened This gives you an overview of the Settings made for you to check Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM Step Actio
164. call up the properties dialog of objects The Shift key is used in conjunction with the keyboard exactly as it is with the mouse for example the Shift key is used to extend an object selection or to reselect a few objects from a number which have already been selected Pressing a key only once only affects the element in the center of the current cell Pressing a key together with Ctrl affects the right side of the current cell Striking a key together with Shift afects the left side of the current cell 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 699 List of symbols and short cut keys Calling up menu The table shows the additional shortcut keys and their corresponding menu command commands avialable in LD Editor see also General Short Cut Keys p 692 Key Menu Entry Command Executed Ctrl A Edit Select All Ctrl Z Edit Reverse Delete Ctrl X Edit Cut Ctrl C Edit Copy Ctrl V Edit Add Del Edit Delete Ctrl O Display Overview Ctrl N Display Normal Ctrl Display Enlarge Ctrl Display Reduce Esc Objects Select Mode Shift H Objekts Link H Objects Direct Link V Objects Vertical Link F Objects FFB Last Type 1 Objects Invert Input Output T Objects Text Shift F Objects select FFB C Objects Contact N O L Objects Contact Open P Objects Contact Positive Flank N
165. ces have been set the dialog looks like this view scrolled all the Representation way to the left CRP 811 00 Profibus DP Master Slave Bus address 1 Slot 7 Delete Parameters Delete Import Presettings Parameters Cut Copy Paste Bus Adr Module Module In Type In Ref End Out Type Out Ref Out End s 11 170 DNT 110 10 1 BOOL 100081 100160 BOOL w 000081 000160 12 170 BDM 344 00 01 BOOL v 100161 100176 000161 000176 13 170 DNT 110 10 1 100177 100192 14 170 110 10 1 100193 100208 000177 000192 15 170 110 10 1 100209 100464 000193 000448 16 170 DNT 110 10 1 BOOL w 100465 100480 w 4 OK Cancel Help Poll 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 789 Configuration examples After the I O references have been set the dialog looks like this view scrolled all the way to the right CRP 811 00 Profibus DP Master Slave Bus address 1 Slot 7 Delete Parameters Delete Import Presettings Parameters Cut Copy Paste End Out Type Out Ref Out End We Length Diag Ref Diag End Description UINT8 v 6 300013 300018 160 BOOL w 000081 000160 170 AMM 090 00 4AI 2A0 4 DI 176 BO
166. cess ryPart config allowed OK Cancel Help Editing Remote To edit the remote drop open the INTERBUS Drop 2 dialog This dialog is reached Drop via the I O map dialog by pressing the Edit command button in the second drop INTERBUS 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 809 Configuration examples Editing Remote Drop Importing INTERBUS Configuration Introduction This section describes the import of the INTERBUS configuration The assignment of I O references takes place in the import dialog before the transfer of the configuration file is performed Note The module parameters are set in the CMD tool see CMD tool user manual because the imported modules are not recognized in Concept Atrium INTERBUS Controller D MB 2 INTERBUS INTERBUS INTERBUS Host computer for Concept and CMD V24 cable PC104 board on a standard AT board INTERBUS configuration OO N 2 810 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Setting I O To specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the INTERBUS Drop 2 dialog References Step Action 1 Select the Import command button Response The Import IBS Configuration dialog is opened Check the Overwrite IBS Drop box Response The Do I O Mappin
167. cess through which a value is transmitted for a Function or for the output of a Function block during Program execution FFB Functions Function blocks Field variables FIR Filter Formal parameters Function FUNC Collective term for EFB elementary functions function blocks and DFB Derived function blocks A variable which is allocated a defined derived data type with the key word ARRAY field A field is a collection of data elements with the same data type Finite Impulse Response Filter a filter with finite impulse answer Input Output parameters which are used within the logic of a FFB and led out of the FFB as inputs outputs A program organization unit which supplies an exact data element when processing a function has no internal status information Multiple invocations of the same function using the same input parameters always supply the same output values Details of the graphic form of the function invocation can be found in the Functional block instance In contrast to the invocation of the function blocks function invocations only have a single unnamed output whose name is the same as the function In FBD each invocation is denoted by a unique number via the graphic block this number is automatically generated and can not be altered 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 967 Glossary Function block Instance FB Function Block Dialog FBD Function block type A function block i
168. chapter Topic Page Introduction 850 How to Convert a Modsoft Program 852 Exceptions 853 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 849 Convertion of Modsoft Programs Introduction Overview Starting the Modsoft Converter The Modsoft env File Incompatibilities For the convertion of an existing Modsoft program to a valid Concept 984 Ladder Logic project the Mosdsoft Converter is used The Modsoft Converter provides current Modsoft users with a migration path to the 984 Ladder Logic for Windows environment The Modsoft Converter requires no previous knowledge of the Concept programming environment The term project is synonymous with a Modsoft program Windows 98 Windows 2000 or Windows NT allows you to run the program from the Start menu by selecting Modsoft Converter in the Concept programm group For the convertion the Modsoft env file is needed The env file contains all the file information pertaining to the Modsoft program The Modsoft env file contains the following files CFG Configuration file PRG Ladder Logic file PCM Network comments PCT Network comments ASC ASCII file USL User Loadables RFD Reference presets set by the user in the Modsoft Reference Data Editor REF Reference contents contained in the PLC from an upload RSF Reference symbols The convert process requires the CFG file to be present in the env file If it does not exist an error dialog is displayed indicat
169. click OK to confirm Stopping the CPU Click the command button OK to confirm stopping the CPU Response You return to the dialog Modbus Target RTU mode and the green point disappears from the graph Activate the check box Bridge if the connection to the Modbus node should be made via a Modbus Plus network using a Modbus bridge Press the appropriate Option button for your system PLC Direct Device Local Head Remote I O Drop Click on the command button Next Response The Operation dialog is opened 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 895 Modbus with EXECLoader Select EXEC file Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file Step Action 1 Press the Option button Transfer EXEC to Device 2 Click on the command button Browse Response The Concept directory is opened in a standard window 3 Double click on the DAT directory Response All available BIN files are displayed 4 Click on the BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired programming language See the table Loading Firmware for Momentum PLC Types p 951 Response The selected BIN file is displayed in File name text field 5 Click on the command button Open Response You return to the dialog Operation and the path to the selected BIN file is displayed in the Filename text field 6 Click on the command button Next Response The dialog File and Devic
170. cribed in step 3 Double click on the read network node in the graphical display Response The Modbus address of the node is automatically entered in the textfeld In the text field Modbus Plus Address Click the right mouse button in the left window Response A context menu with individual PLC commands is opened If the Run display is liton the CPU stop the program using the command Stop PLC Response A message window appears where you can click OK to confirm stopping the CPU Click the command button OK to confirm stopping the CPU Response You return to the Modbus Plus Target dialog and the green point disappears from the graph Activate the check box Bridge if the connection to the Modbus network node should be made via a Modbus network using a Modbus bridge Press the appropriate Option button for your system PLC Local Head Remote Drop Click on the command button Next Response The Operation dialog is opened 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 915 Modbus Plus with EXECLoader Select EXEC file out the following steps to select the EXEC file Step Action 1 Press the Option button Transfer EXEC to Device 2 Click on the command button Browse Response The Concept directory is opened in a standard window 3 Double click on the DAT directory Response All available BIN files are displayed 4 Click on the BIN file that corresponds to
171. ction 1 Start Windows Insert the CD MBX Driver Suite ver 4 20 Select the Start Execute command Enter the CD drive and SETUP in the command line Confirm with OK Ww Follow the onscreen instructions created in the Start Menu Response After installation the WinConX program with all installed drivers is Configuration occurs automatically after installing the driver To make changes to the configuration open the dialog to be edited from the WinConX xxx MBX Driver Start Menu by double clicking on the xxx MBX Configuration Editor symbol 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 865 Presettings for Modbus Plus Virtual MBX Driver for 16 bit application capability with Windows 98 2000 NT Introduction Preconditions Installation Configuration Installing the Virtual MBX driver guarantees the run capability of all 16 bit DOS or Windows 3 x NETLIB NetBIOS compatible applications in their original binary form in Windows 98 2000 NT Note A detailed description of this driver can be found in the VMBX9X or VMBXNT Help file on the MBX Driver Suite ver4 20 CD In order for the Virtual MBX driver to function correctly additional drivers must be installed The following additional drivers can be installed to enhance the Virtual MBX driver s run capability Driver Operating Application system MBX Windows 98 Dri
172. d button Next Response The Modbus Plus Target dialog is opened 3 Select from the list Devices Online the adapter address you set when installing the SA85 in the CONFIG SYS file Parameter n 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 929 Modbus Plus with EXECLoader Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus Plus protocol settings Step Action 1 Click on the command button Scan Response The nodes on the Modbus Plus network are read and displayed graphically in the left window A green point in the graphic indicates that the CPU is in RUN mode To stop the CPU continue as described in step 3 Double click on the read network node in the graphical display Response The Modbus address of the node is automatically entered in the textfeld In the text field Modbus Plus Address Click the right mouse button in the left window Response A context menu with individual PLC commands is opened If the Run display is lit on the CPU stop the program using the command Stop PLC Response A message window appears where you can click OK to confirm stopping the CPU Click the command button OK to confirm stopping the CPU Response You return to the Modbus Plus Target dialog and the green point disappears from the graph Activate the check box Bridge if the connection to the Modbus network node should be made via a Modbus network using a Modbus bridge Pres
173. data element is 16 bits The value range for variables of this data type extends from 0 to 2exp 16 1 Unlocated variables are not allocated a state RAM address They therefore do not occupy any state RAM addresses The value of these variables is saved in the internal system and can be changed using the reference data editor These variables are only addressed using their symbolic names Signals requiring no peripheral access e g intermediate results system tags etc should be primarily declared as unlocated variables Variables Variables are used to exchange data within a section between several sections and between the program and the PLC Variables consist of at least one variable name and one data type If a variable is assigned a direct address reference it is called a located variable If the variable has no direct address assigned to it it is called an unlocated variable If the variable is assigned with a derived data type it is called a multi element variable There are also constants and literals 982 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Glossary W Warning If a critical status is detected during the processing of a FFB or a step e g critical input values or an exceeded time limit a warning appears which can be seen using the Online Event Viewer menu command For FFBs the ENO remains set to 1 w WORD WORD stands for the data type bit sequence 16 Entries are made as base 2 literal base 8
174. duction TSX Momentum is a modular system Bus adapters e g 170 INT 110 00 and CPU adapters e g 171 CCC 760 10 IEC work in conjunction with an I O unit as independent modules In order to function properly each I O unit must be equipped with an adapter Editing local drop Introduction This section describes the configuration of the first local drop The processing sequence begins first of all with the definition of all drops When editing the first local drop the modules must be set with their I O references before parameters can be set forindividual modules Momentum remote controller with I O bus XP 3 LLL o Host Computer unit e g 170 AAI 030 00 Interface adapter CPU adapter e g 171 CCC 760 10 IEC I O bus interface e g 172 PNN 210 22 Bus adapter e g 170 INT 110 00 unit e g 170 AMM 090 00 0 WO N 814 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Defining Drops To define drops proceed as follows in the PLC Configuration window Step Action 1 Select PLC Selection Response The PLC selection dialog is opened 2 Select the PLC family Momentum and CPU 171 CCC 760 10
175. dung herstellen 836 Convert Projects DFBs Macros 837 Converting projects DFBS 837 Concept 841 Ata Glance i ote vue bee ane ead PISO eae 841 IntrodUctlOr caca ue ERR Re eA ee ake BAUR TNR es eye es 843 Integration of Third Party Modules 844 Glace sd cote cle s lentes seed La sos te dade cd am Mte es iret eo 844 Integrating new 845 Removing Modules 846 VI G 3 Appendix H Appendix Appendix J Appendix K Appendix L Appendix M Use of third party module in 847 Convertion of Modsoft Programs 849 Ata Glance tz i Ae a ee PE a EG WEAR Y YT 849 850 How to Convert Modsoft Program 852 Exceptions ohne ye dex pee 853 Modsoft and 984 855 Ata Glamnees cos et eoo etr Y He EPI 855 Modsoft Keys with Concept 856 Modsoft Function 858 Presettings when using Modbus Plus for startup 859
176. during transfer CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows LED Response Ready lit Run slow flashing Modbus not lit Modbus fast flashing CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows Hanster LED Response Ready lit Run not lit Modbus not lit Modbus fast flashing Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project p 43 software connection Note If you recieve an error message close Concept and start the BDRESET EXE file in the Concept directory to reset the SA85 Then start again from the first step 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 917 Modbus Plus with EXECLoader Compact first startup with EXECLoader Introduction This section describes the first startup of Compact when used with Modbus Plus The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections e Start EXECLoader p 918 Define SA85 adapter p 918 Protocol settings p 919 Select EXEC file p 920 Load EXEC file p 920 Start The procedure for launching EXECLoaders is as follows EXECLoader Step Action 1 Open the Concept start menu Response All installed Concept programs are displayed as symbols 2 Click on the symbol with the identifier EXECLoader Response The EXECLoader program is started 3 Click on the command Next as soon as you have read the information on the page
177. e modified by the logic program write protected Contact A contact is a LD element which transfers a status on the horizontal link to its right side This status comes from the boolean AND link of the status of the horizontal link on the left side with the status of the relevant variable direct address A contact does not change the value of the relevant variable direct address D Data transfer Settings which determine how information is transferred from your programming settings device to the PLC Data Types The overview shows the data type hierarchy as used for inputs and outputs of functions and function blocks Generic data types are denoted using the prefix ANY e ANY_ELEM e ANY NUM ANY REAL REAL ANY INT DINT INT UDINT UINT e ANY BIT BOOL BYTE WORD e TIME e System Data types IEC Extensions e Derived from ANY data types 964 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Glossary DCP I O drop DDE Dynamic Data Exchange Declaration Definitions file Concept EFB Derived Data Type Derived Function Block DFB A remote network with a super ordinate PLC can be controlled using a Distributed Control Processor D908 When using a D908 with remote PLC the super ordinate PLC considers the remote PLC as a remote I O drop The D908 and the remote PLC communicate via the system bus whereby a high performance is achieved with minimum effect on the cycle time The data exchange between the D908 and the super
178. e 5 p 778 39 3 RETAIN identifier for internal Function Blocks Note 5 p 718 39 14 Assignment of storage locations with fields Note 5 p 718 39 18 Assignment of storage locations and start values for fields Note 5 p 718 39 19 Use of directly displayed variables Note 2 p 717 Note 1 p 717 40 1 Step Start step graphical form with directional links 40 2 Step Start step text form without directional links Note 8 40 3a Step marker general form 40 4 Step time elapsed general form 41 1 Transition condition in ST language within the graphic Note 8 p 718 41 5 Transition condition in ST language textual reference Note 9 p 718 41 6 Transition condition in IL language textual reference Note 9 p 718 41 7 Use of the transition name 41 7b Transition condition in FBD language 41 7 Transition condition in IL language 41 7d Transition condition in ST language 42 1 Each Boolean variable can be an action 43 1 Action block 716 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 IEC conformity Table Property Property description number number 43 2 Concatenated action blocks 43 3 Step body in text form Note 8 p 718 44 1 Identifier 44 2 Action name 45 1 Not saved no identifier 45 2 N not saved 45 3 R Overriding reset 45 4 S Set saved 45 5 L Time limited 45 6 D Delayed 45 7 P Pulse 45 9 DS
179. e Info is opened Information is provided here about the selected BIN file and also about the PLC 7 Click on the command button Next Response The Summary dialog is opened This gives you an overview of the settings made for you to check Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM Step Action 1 Click on the command button Transfer Response A message box appears warning you that all data available on the PLC will be lost and the configuration and program must be reloaded on the PLC Click on the command button Yes to continue the transfer Response The Progress dialog is opened This gives information about the progress of the transfer in a progress bar and text Click Close once the transfer is complete Response The dialog is closed and you return to the dialog Summary Click on the command button Close to close the EXECLoader 896 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus with EXECLoader during transfer CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows LED Response Run slow flashing COM ACT lit with some interruptions Modbus 3x flashes with interruptions CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows Hansen LED Response Run not lit COM ACT not lit Modbus 3x flashes with interruptions Note The three flash sequence Modbus display idicates th
180. e Option button Modbus ASCII RS232 for the ASCII transfer mode Note Data transfer can only take place if you have configured the same transfer mode RTU or ASCII on the CPU using a button on the front of the module Click on the command button Next Response The dialog Modbus Target RTU ASCII mode is opened Use the command button COM Port Settings to open the dialog COM Properties Use the list field Connect using to select the programming cable interface on the PC default setting is COM Use the list field Bits per second to select the Baudrate default is 9600 Use the list field Parity to select the parity default is EVEN Use the list field Stop Bits to select the Stop bits default is 1 co Ooj oO0 Click on the command button OK Response The dialog is closed and you return to the dialog Modbus Target gt RTU ASCII Mode 880 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus with EXECLoader Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus protocol Step Action 1 Click on the command button Scan Response The nodes on the Modbus network are read and displayed graphically in the left window A green point in the graphic indicates that the CPU is in RUN mode To stop the CPU continue as described in step 3 Double click on the read network node in the graphical display Response The Modbus address of the node is automatically ente
181. e Zoom 373 References 370 Replace References 375 Requirements 368 Section 365 Segement 365 Select 372 Short Cut Keys 705 Subroutines 376 Trace 375 Undo 371 Variables 370 LL984 processing speed optimized 535 LL984 section Animation 557 Load reference data 497 Loadables 78 CPU 424 02 123 CPU X13 0X 123 Atrium 158 compact 142 CPU 434 12 131 CPU 534 14 131 Loading 548 Loading a project 546 General information 547 Loading firmware 949 Local derived data type 471 Local DFB 394 Local macro 429 Located variables Changing signal states in RDE 491 Lock Section 39 Index Loop FBD 178 LD 207 Macro 425 428 Calling up from SFC 441 Calls from FBD 444 Calls from LD 444 Create 435 Delete 611 Documentation 601 Exchange marking 430 context sensitive help 433 global 429 local 429 Convert 837 Maximum supervision time 221 MBX Driver Driver for connection between ModConnect Host interface adapters and 32 bit applications with Windows 98 2000 NT 867 Memory Memory optimization for Compact CPUs 139 Memory Optimization for Quantum CPU X13 OX and 424 02 114 Optimize 107 111 PLC Independent Memory Optimization 111 Structure 107 memory optimization for Momentum CPUs 149 memory optimization for Quantum CPU 434 12 and 534 14 128 optimize 110 Memory partitions 47 Memory statistics 544 Menu commands 666 Minimum configuration 47 Minimum supervision time 222 MMS E
182. e displayed 4 Click on the BIN file CTSX201D Response The selected BIN file is displayed in File name text field 5 Click on the command button Open Response You return to the dialog Operation and the path to the selected BIN file is displayed in the Filename text field 6 Click on the command button Next Response The dialog File and Device Info is opened Information is provided here about the selected BIN file and also about the PLC 7 Click on the command button Next Response The Summary dialog is opened This gives you an overview of the settings made for you to check Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM Step Action 1 Click on the command button Transfer Response A message box appears warning you that all data available on the PLC will be lost and the configuration and program must be reloaded on the PLC Click on the command button Yes to continue the transfer Response The Progress dialog is opened This gives information about the progress of the transfer in a progress bar and text Click Close once the transfer is complete Response The dialog is closed and you return to the dialog Summary Click on the command button Close to close the EXECLoader 886 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus with EXECLoader during transfer CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows LED
183. e first startup of Momentum for LL984 when used with Modbus Plus Note Loading the EXEC file for LL984 is not necessary with a new computer since it is preloaded in the the CPUs Flash RAM Loading the EXEC file for LL984 is only necessary if you have already loaded the EXEC file for IEC and now wish to change You should always check to see if a new EXEC version has been released in the meantime This information and the current EXEC file can be found on our website at www schneiderautomation com You can see the currently loaded version of the EXEC file in Concept using the Online Online controller menu command The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections e Start EXECLoader p 929 Define SA85 adapter p 929 Protocol settings p 930 Select EXEC file p 931 Load EXEC file p 931 Start The procedure for launching EXECLoaders is as follows EXECLoader Step Action 1 Open the Concept start menu Response All installed Concept programs are displayed as symbols 2 Click on the symbol with the identifier EXECLoader Response The EXECLoader program is started 3 Click on the command Next as soon as you have read the information on the page Response The dialog Communication Protocol is opened Define SA85 Carry out the following steps to define the LAN address set in the CONFIG SYS file adapter Step Action 1 Select the option button Modbus Plus 2 Click on the comman
184. e in the CPU flash RAM Step Action 1 Select the option Load File To PLC Response The Loading Process window is opened and the warning The PROGRAM contents of the device being loaded could be lost after loading a new Executive The CONTENTS stored in the Micro H H P will always be lost after loading a new Executive Would you like to continue Y N N is displayed Acknowledge the warning with Y Response The message Node failed to enter normal mode appears The DOWNLOAD PROGRESS window appears which shows the transfer rate Response After the transfer is complete the message Download Operation Successful appears Confirm the message with RETURN Response You return to the main menu Select the Exit Program option Response The DOS Loader is exited 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 907 Modbus with DOS Loader CPU display during transfer CPU display after transfer Creating the software connection During transfer the CPU display is as follows LED Response Run slow flashing COM ACT lit with some interruptions Modbus 3x flashes with interruptions After transfer the CPU display is as follows LED Response Run not lit COM ACT not lit Modbus 3x flashes with interruptions Note The three flash sequence Modbus display idicates that no communication is present on the bus This is displayed
185. e is automatically inserted in the I O map in slot 7 of the selected drop In the Go To list box the Local RIO Slot 7 network link is displayed 6 Select the last free row in the table and insert the second drop with the command button Insert Response The second drop is entered in the Type column of the table Note The number of drops to be inserted is defined in the segment scheduler dialog The default predetermines the maximum number of 32 so that settings are not necessary 7 Select the last free row in the table again and insert the third drop with the Insert command button Response The second drop is entered in the Type column of the table 8 Select the third drop and open the list box in the Type column Select the 800 I O option Dialog display VO Map Reserve for expansion 144 4 Insert Delete Go To Local RIO slot 7 v Cut Copy Paste Drop Type Supervision in bits Outbits Status Edit 1 Quantum I O 3 0 0 Edit 2 Quantuml O 3 0 0 Edit 800 1 0 3 0 0 Edit To insert at the end of the list select this line v Remote I O OK Cancel Help 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 745 Configuration examples Mapping Modules and Specifying I O References Step Action Select the first dro
186. e modules must be specified with their I O references before the individuals modules can be parameterized Momentum remote controller with I O bus A SR 1 Host Computer unit e g 170 AAI 030 00 Interface adapter e g 172 PNN 210 22 CPU adapter e g 171 CCC 760 10 984 I O bus interface Bus adapter e g 170 INT 110 00 unit e g 170 AMM 090 00 oO 25 WO ND a 818 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the Local Modules and TSX Compact Drop dialog Specifying I O Step Action References 1 Select the Module column Response The I O Module Selection dialog is opened 2 From the Category column select the all option Response All modules are listed in the Modules column 3 Select from the column Modules the module AMM 090 00 Exit the dialog with OK Response The module is inserted in the I O m
187. e prefix 1 e g 100001 Coil References have the prefix 0 e g 000001 Input Register References have the prefix 3 e g 300001 and Output Register References have the prefix 4 e g 400001 Response The end reference of the available address range In End or Out End column is entered automatically 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 801 Configuration examples Dialog Following module mapping and I O reference specification the dialog looks like this Representation Local TSX Compact Drop Drop Module Output bits 64 Status table Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste Rack Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description 1 1 CPU TSX COMPACT imi 1 2 CPU TSX COMPACT MVB258A 300001 300001 400001 400001 MVB Controller w RS232 1 4 1 5 S9 2 1 DEP214 254 100001 100016 DC 16 IN 12 60V 2 2 DEP2x6 2x7 100017 100032 DC 16 IN 2 3 DAP210 000001 1000008 AC 8 OUT 115 230V 2 4 DAP208 258 000009 1000016 8 OUT 24 110VDC 24 2 5 3 1 ADU206 256 300065 300069 Analog 4 In 3 2 DAU2x2 400002 400003 An Out 2 ch Volt or Cu 3 3 3 4 4 OK Cancel Help Poll 802 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Parameter To parameterize the individu
188. e transfer of the CNF file is displayed in the Import Status dialog 3 Close the dialog after the transfer 100 Response The imported configuration is displayed in the CRP 811 00 Profibus DP dialog 784 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Dialog Following the import of the configuration the dialog looks like this view scrolled all Representation the way to the left CRP 811 00 Profibus DP Master Slave Bus address 1 Slot 7 Delete Parameters Delete Import Presettings Parameters Cut Copy Paste Bus Adr Module Module In Type In Ref In End Out Type Out Ref Out End 11 170 DNT 110 10 1 BOOL v 100081 100160 BOOL v 000081 000160 12 170 344 00 01 v 100161 100176 BOOL v 000161 000176 13 170 DNT 110 10 1 BOOL v 100177 100192 14 170 DNT 110 10 1 v 100193 100208 BOOL v 000177 000192 15 170 DNT 110 10 1 v 100209 100464 BOOL v 000193 000448 16 170 DNT 110 10 1 BOOL v 100465 100480 w 4 Help Poll 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 785 Configuration examples Following the import of the configuration the dialog looks like this view scrolled all the way to the right
189. ed and you return to the dialog Summary Click on the command button Close to close the EXECLoader 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 891 Modbus with EXECLoader CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows during transfer LED Response Run slow flashing COM ACT lit with some interruptions Modbus 3x flashes with interruptions CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows transfer LED Response Run not lit COM ACT not lit Modbus 3x flashes with interruptions Note The three flash sequence Modbus display idicates that no communication is present on the bus This is displayed on Modbus by a non lit COM ACT display The COM ACT display is lit again once connection is made with Concept Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project p 43 software connection 892 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus with EXECLoader Momentum first startup for LL984 with EXECLoader Introduction This section describes the first startup of Momentum for LL984 when used with Modbus Note Loading the EXEC file for LL984 is not necessary with a new computer since it is preloaded in the the CPUs Flash RAM Loading the EXEC file for LL984 is only necessary if you have already loaded the EXEC file for IEC and now wish to change You should always check to see if a new EXEC version has been r
190. ef columns set the start references for the input and output modules Note Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 e g 100001 Coil References have the prefix 0 e g 000001 Input Register References have the prefix 3 e g 300001 and Output Register References have the prefix 4 e g 400001 Response The end reference column In End or Out End of the available address range is automatically entered Dialog display Following module mapping and I O reference specification the dialog looks like this Local Momentum Drop Drop m Module Modules 1 Input bits 0 Input bits 0 Output bits 0 Params Output bits 0 Status table Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description AAI 030 00 300001 300008 400001 1400002 I O BASE ANALOG 8CH DI 4 OK Cancel Help Poll Note With this addressing the 8 measurements of the AAI 030 00 are to be found in the words 300001 300008 The parameters are in the words 400001 and 400002 816 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Set Module To set parameters for the module proceed as follows in the Local Momentum Drop Parameters dialog Step Action 1 Select the Params command button Response The 170 DDI 353 00 dialog is
191. el Start Settings Control Panel 2 Select the System symbol Response The window System Properties is called Select the register card Device Manager A Select the adapter SA85 000 and press Properties Response The SA85 000 Adapter Properties window is opened Select the register Device Settings Make the following changes also see Help file LMBX9X on the driver CD Select the register Resources to change the memory area co o oc Exit the window by clicking OK Response The changes are excepted by the system 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 861 Presettings for Modbus Plus Win 2000 Edit SA85 configuration Peer Cop functionality To edit the SA85 configuration with Windows 2000 carry out the following steps after the first configuration Step Action 1 Open the control panel Start Settings Control Panel 2 Select the System symbol Response The System Properties window is opened Select the register Hardware Select Device Manager Response The Device Manager is opened Select Network Adapter SA85 000 Select the Properties command button Response The SA85 000 Adapter Properties window is opened Select the register Device Settings Make the following changes also see Help file LMBX9X on the driver CD Select the register Resources to change the memory area
192. eleased in the meantime This information and the current EXEC file can be found on our website at www schneiderautomation com You can see the currently loaded version of the EXEC file in Concept using the Online Online controller menu command The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections e Start EXECLoader p 893 Define Modbus interface p 894 Protocol settings p 895 Select EXEC file p 896 Load EXEC file p 896 Start The procedure for launching EXECLoaders is as follows EXECLoader Step Action 1 Open the Concept start menu Response All installed Concept programs are displayed as symbols 2 Click on the symbol with the identifier EXECLoader Response The EXECLoader program is started 3 Click on the command Next as soon as you have read the information on the page Response The dialog Communication Protocol is opened 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 893 Modbus with EXECLoader Define Modbus interface Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus interface Step Action 1 Select the Option button Modbus RTU RS232 for the RTU transfer mode Select the Option button Modbus ASCII RS232 for the ASCII transfer mode Note Data transfer can only take place if you have configured the same transfer mode RTU or ASCII on the CPU using a button on the front of the module Click on the command button Next Response The dialog Modbus Target
193. elete Cut Copy Paste Rack Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description 1 1 93 00 RIO DROP S908 1 2 DDI 353 00 100033 100064 DC IN 24V 4x8 1 3 DDO 353 00 000033 000064 DC OUT 24V 4x8 1 4 AVI 030 00 300033 300041 AN IN 8CH BIPOLAR AVO 020 00 400033 400036 AN OUT 4CH VOLT 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 v 4 OK Cancel Help Poll Set module To set parameters for individual modules use the dialog RIO slot 7 Quantum parameters l O St 2 and proceed as follows Step Action 1 From the Rack Slot column select the 1 2 line Response The 1 2 text box has a dark background i e the DDI 353 00 module has been selected for editing 2 Select the Params command button Response The 140 DDI 353 00 dialog is opened 3 Select the Discrete option button Response You return to the I O map 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example Note The modules are sometimes set with different parameters Help with this can be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog 750 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Editing Remote The third defined drop is edited in the RIO Slot 7 800 Drop 3 dialog 800 Drops This dialog can be reached in two ways e Inthe I O Map dialog using the Edit command button or e inthe RIO Slot 7 Quantum Drop 2 dialog using the Next command button Editing Remote Drop Introduction This Section descri
194. elp Select the drop from the Drop column Select the Edit command button Response You reach the module map 756 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the Local Modules and Quantum Drop dialog Specifying I O Step Action References 1 Select the Module column Response The I O Module Selection dialog is opened 2 From the Category column select the lt all gt option Response All modules are listed in the Modules column 3 In the Modules column select the CPS 214 00 module Exit the dialog with OK Response The module is inserted in the I O map 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example see Local Quantum Drop dialog representation 5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns set the start references for the input and output modules Note Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 e g 100001 Coil References have the prefix 0 e g 000001 Input Register References have the prefix 3 e g 300001 and Output Register References have the prefix 4 e g 400001 Response The end reference column In End or Out End of the available address range is automatically entered 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 757 Configuration examples Dialog display Set module parameters Editing Remote Drop Following
195. ened Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus interface Step Action 1 Select the Option button Modbus RTU RS232 for the RTU transfer mode Select the Option button Modbus ASCII RS232 for the ASCII transfer mode Note Data transfer can only take place if you have configured the same transfer mode RTU or ASCII on the CPU using a button on the front of the module Click on the command button Next Response The dialog Modbus Target RTU ASCII mode is opened Use the command button COM Port Settings to open the dialog COM Properties Use the list field Connect using to select the programming cable interface on the PC default setting is COM Use the list field Bits per second to select the Baudrate default is 9600 Use the list field Parity to select the parity default is EVEN Use the list field Stop Bits to select the Stop bits default is 1 co Ooj oO0 Click on the command button OK Response The dialog is closed and you return to the dialog Modbus Target gt RTU ASCII Mode 884 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus with EXECLoader Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus protocol Step Action 1 Click on the command button Scan Response The nodes on the Modbus network are read and displayed graphically in the left window A green point in the graphic indicates that the CPU is in RUN
196. eps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM Step Action 1 Click on the command button Transfer Response A message box appears warning you that all data available on the PLC will be lost and the configuration and program must be reloaded on the PLC 2 Click on the command button Yes to continue the transfer Response The Progress dialog is opened This gives information about the progress of the transfer in a progress bar and text 3 Click Close once the transfer is complete Response The dialog is closed and you return to the dialog Summary 4 Click on the command button Close to close the EXECLoader 920 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus Plus with EXECLoader during transfer CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows LED Response Ready lit Run slow flashing Modbus not lit Modbus fast flashing CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows Hanster LED Response Ready lit Run not lit Modbus not lit Modbus fast flashing Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project p 43 software connection Note If you recieve an error message close Concept and start the BDRESET EXE file in the Concept directory to reset the SA85 Then start again from the first step 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 921 Modbus Plus with EXECLoader Atri
197. ept needs to resolve those elements The Modsoft Ladder Logic program is converted without performing any validity checks against the Configuration When the Modsoft prg file contains either SFC or Macros the convert process is aborted and an Error dialog is displayed informing you to return to Modsoft and use Segment Status Commands Convert to File This process expands the Macros and translates the SFC elements Modsoft sets a default I O map size of 512 Concept does not but calculates the size as required Uploading a Controller that has been downloaded with Modsoft will cause a miscompare You are allowed to continue Modsoft can have two types of reference data or none at all There exists online reference data information RAM if you have uploaded from the PLC There are also references defined using the offline Reference Data Editor When both types of data exist in the env file the convert utility first imports the online references then overlays the offline reference data 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 851 Convertion of Modsoft Programs How to Convert a Modsoft Program Precondition For converting a Modsoft program the Modsoft env file See The Modsoft env File p 850 is necessary The env file contains all the file information pertaining to the Modsoft program Once selected the conversion takes place and you are prompted to a Save as dialog Howto Converta For converting a Modsoft programm
198. er Step Action 1 In the start menu open the folder WinConX MBXDriver Start Programs gt WinConX 2 Double click on the symbol MBX Driver Configuration Response The dialog box MBX Driver Configuration is opened 3 In the register Device Configuration click on the command button New Response In the column Device Type a list box is shown 4 Select the option SA85 from the list box Response The dialog box SA85 Configuration is opened 5 Make the following settings also see Help file LMBX9X on the driver CD 6 Exit the dialog box by clicking Close Response The settings are excepted by the system 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 863 Presettings for Modbus Plus Edit SA85 Carry out the following steps to edit the SA85 configuration if it has already been configuration configured Step Action 1 In the start menu open the folder WinConX MBXDriver Start Programs gt WinConX 2 Double click on the symbol MBX Driver Configuration Response The dialog box MBX Driver Configuration is opened Select SA85 in the register Device Configuration 4 Click on the Edit command button Response The dialog box SA85 Configuration is opened Make the following changes also see Help file LMBX9X on the driver CD Exit the dialog box by clicking Close Response The settings are excepted by the system Peer Cop Several parameter settings must be made t
199. es command button Response The Microsoft TCP IP Properties dialog box is opened Dialog display Microsoft TCP IP Properties IP address DNS WINS address Routing if an DHCP server is not available in the network Enter this address below Network cards A DHCP server can automatically assign this network card an IP address Get an address from your network administrator 1 3 Com Etherlink IIl Adapter v Get IP address from a DHCP server Enter IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Standard Gateway S Options OK Cancel Apply Select the register IP Address and make the following settings Response The programming device is then registered for network operation with the IP address 828 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Network Declare this IP address in the operating system as follows configuration in x Ste Action Win 2000 P 1 Select Start Settings Network and Dial Up Connections Response The Network and Dial Up Connections window is opened 2 Select the LAN Connection icon Response The LAN Connection status dialog box is opened Dialog display Status of LAN Connection General Terminate Status Establish connection Duration 00 12 20
200. es parameterized differently Help with this can be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 803 Configuration examples E 9 Atrium Example INTERBUS Controller Introduction Overview This Chapter contains the step by step process for the configuration of an INTERBUS controller with Atrium PC based What s in this This section contains the following topics section Topic Page General Information 805 INTERBUS Export Settings in CMD 805 Editing Local Drop 806 Editing Remote Drop Importing INTERBUS Configuration 810 804 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples General Information Introduction The configuration of the INTERBUS is done using the PHONIX software CMD It is initially stored as a file SVC This generated file is loaded into Concept and is visible in the I O map of the configurator Before the INTERBUS nodes are imported set up the first drop Atrium I O with the CPU board 180 CCO 121 01 and 180 CCO 241 01 and the INTERBUS master CRP 660 00 A maximum of two INTERBUS masters may be inserted The diagnosis of the field bus can take place in the CRP 660 00 register in Concept INTERBUS Export Settings in CMD Introduction The CMD tool Configuration Monitoring and Diagnostic tool is used to configure the INTERBUS For information about this refer to the correspond
201. et dialog and the green point disappears from the graph Activate the check box Bridge if the connection to the Modbus network node should be made via a Modbus network using a Modbus bridge Press the appropriate Option button for your system PLC Local Head Remote Drop Click on the command button Next Response The Operation dialog is opened 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 919 Modbus Plus with EXECLoader Select EXEC file out the following steps to select the EXEC file Step Action 1 Press the Option button Transfer EXEC to Device 2 Click on the command button Browse Response The Concept directory is opened in a standard window 3 Double click on the DAT directory Response All available BIN files are displayed 4 Click on the BIN file CTSX201D Response The selected BIN file is displayed in File name text field 5 Click on the command button Open Response You return to the dialog Operation and the path to the selected BIN file is displayed in the Filename text field 6 Click on the command button Next Response The dialog File and Device Info is opened Information is provided here about the selected BIN file and also about the PLC 7 Click on the command button Next Response The Summary dialog is opened This gives you an overview of the settings made for you to check Load EXEC file Carry out the following st
202. fb e Exporting macros From the Format list select the extension mac 5 Select the project DFB macro and confirm with OK Reaction The project DFBs macros data structures derived data types will be contained in the current directory as an ASCII data file asc 6 Quit the Concept converter with File Quit 838 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Convert Projects DFBs Macros Installing new versions of Concepts Importing project DFB macro Editing the project DFB macro CAUTION Risk of losing data Only install the NEW version of Concept if you have performed the previous steps Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage Follow the procedure described in the Installation chapter of the installation instructions The procedure for importing projects DFBs macros is as follows Step Action 1 Start the Concept converter 2 From File Import open the select import projects DFBs macros dialog box Select the project DFB macro data file format asc and confirm with OK Reaction The project DFBs macros data structures will be contained in the current directory as Concept data files Quit the Concept converter with File Quit Start the Concept Concept DFB and edit the project DFBs macros data structures in the usual way 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 839 Conver
203. finition of a data structure divided into input output and internal variables 2 a set of operations which are performed with elements of the data structure when a function block type instance is invoked This set of operations can either be formulated in one of the IEC languages DFB type or in C EFB type A function block type can be instanced invoked several times Function The function number is used to uniquely denote a function in a program or DFB The Number function number can not be edited and is automatically assigned The function number is always formed as follows n m n section number current number m Number of the FFB object in the section current number 968 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Glossary G Generic Data Type Generic literals Global Data Global derived data types Global DFBs Global macros Groups EFBs A data type which stands in place of several other data types If the literal s data type is not relevant simply specify the value for the literal If this is the case Concept automatically assigns the literal a suitable data type Global data are Unlocated variables Global derived data types are available in each Concept project and are occupied in the DFB directory directly under the Concept directory Global DFBs are available in each Concept project The storage of the global DFBs is dependant upon the settings in the CONCEPT INI file Global macros are available
204. formula Ctrl K Networks Delete Picture up Networks Next Picture up Networks Previous Ctrl M Networks Commentary 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 705 List of symbols and short cut keys Short Cut Keys Menu Entry Command Executed Ctrl T Online Trace Ctrl B Online Retrace 706 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 IEC conformity At a Glance Overview This Chapter contains the standards tables required by IEC 1131 1 What s in this This chapter contains the following Sections 9 chapter Section Topic Page D 1 What is the IEC 1131 3 standard 709 D 2 IEC standards tables 712 D 3 Expansions of IEC 1131 3 730 D 4 Text language syntax 731 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 707 IEC conformity 708 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 IEC conformity D 1 What is the IEC 1131 3 standard At a Glance Overview This section contains general information about IEC 1131 3 and the implemented IEC conformity test What s in this This section contains the following topics section Topic Page General information about IEC conformity 710 IEC Conformity Test 711 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 709 IEC conformity General information about IEC conformity At a Glance The IEC standard 1131 3 compare chapter 1 4 specifies the syntax and semantics of a standardized series of pr
205. g check box becomes available Check the Do I O Mapping check box Response The Digital Module in 3x 4x Range check box and the Input 3x and Output 4x text boxes become available Uncheck the Digital Module in 3x 4x Range check box Response The Input 1x and Output 0x text boxes become available Enter the value 100 in the Input 3x and Output 4x text boxes Response The 3x and 4x address ranges of the imported module begin with the start references 300100 and 400100 Note The 1x and Ox address ranges retain the default value 1 i e these address ranges begin with the start references 100001 and 000001 Dialog display Import IBS configuration Options Start refs For I O assignment Overwrite IBS Drop Input Output 1 1 1 Do I O mapping 1100 4 100 Map Discretes to 3x 4x OK Cancel Help Exit the dialog with OK Response The Select Import File dialog is opened Enter the path of the configuration file SVC Select OK Response The Dialog Import Status dialog is opened the file transfer starts and the import status is displayed Following the transfer 100 close the dialog Response The imported INTERBUS configuration is displayed in the INTERBUS Drop 2 dialog in the I O map 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 811 Configurati
206. han or equal to 334 Not equal to 334 OR 335 XOR 335 ST command 331 333 330 331 930 332 gt 333 gt 333 Addition 332 Assignment 337 Call function block 351 CASE OF END CASE 343 Complement formation 331 Declaration 338 Division 332 Empty instruction 349 EXIT 349 Exponentiation 330 FOR TO BY DO END FOR 344 FUNCNAME 330 function invocation 354 Greater than 333 Greater than Equal to 333 IF THEN END IF 340 MOD 332 Modulo 332 Multiplication 331 Negation 331 NOT 331 REPEAT UNTIL END REPEAT 348 Subtraction 333 Use of parentheses 330 VAR END VAR 338 WHILE DO END WHILE 346 ST commandl 332 Start behavior variable 35 Startup Presettings for Modbus 873 Presettings for Modbus Plus 859 Startup with DOS Loader Modbus 899 Modbus Plus 933 XV Index Startup with the EXECLoader Modbus 879 Modbus Plus 913 State of the PLC 531 Status 519 Status bar 663 ST Command Boolean Exclusive OR 335 Step 221 alias designations 248 Step delay time 221 Step duration 221 Step properties Process 239 Storage of global DFBs during upload settings in the INI file 957 String control 255 Structure PLC Memory 107 Program 29 Project 29 30 program 30 Structured text 321 Structured variables Import 590 Subroutines LL984 376 SY MAX Controller 774 Quantum configuration example 769 Symax Et
207. hange variables onto an FFB do the following Step Action 1 Use the cursor keys or Shift cursor keys to move the cursor to the FFB variables to be changed 2 Press Enter Reaction The link FFB dialog for the selected input output opens To change the number of inputs outputs with extendable FFBs do the following number ot Step Action inputs outputs 1 Use the cursor keys or Shift cursor keys to move the cursor to the centre of the lower edge of the FFB s block frame 2 Press Space bar Down cursor key to generate further inputs outputs Press Space bar Up cursor key to hide further inputs outputs Reaction The number of inputs outputs is changed 698 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 List of symbols and short cut keys Shortcut keys in the LD Editor At a Glance Rules Concept supports the work with the keyboard in the graphic editors Although the mouse is a more appropriate input tool it is nevertheless possible to operate Concept with the keyboard alone especially in machine environments The Editors behave in the same way regardless of whether they are operated with the mouse or with the keyboard The following general rules need to be observed The space bar corresponds to the left mouse button i e the space bar is used for selecting and moving The Enter key corresponds to the double click with the left mouse button for example the input key is used to
208. has not already been assigned to another device Double addressing causes an unforeseeable function in the network After addressing saving to Flash is recommended Online Control Panel Flash Program so that the settings are not lost in case of a power outage 822 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Network Configuration in Different Operating Systems Network Declare this IP address in the operating system as follows non ae in Step Action 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel Network Response The Network dialog box is opened Dialog display Network Configuration Identification Access control The following network components are installed Client for Microsoft networks DEC Etherworks 3 All ISA versions File and printer enabling for Microsoft networks Add Remove Properties Primary Network Logon Client for Microsoft networks v File and printer enabling Description The Microsoft TCP IP protocol serves to create Internet and WAN links 2 Select the register Configuration Select the network connection TCP IP 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 823 Configuration examples Step Action Select the Properties command button Response The TCP IP Properties dialog is opened Dialog display TCP IP Pro
209. have reached the first page of the online help contents directory the button is hidden gt gt This button is used to browse to the next help text This button is used to read the online help like a book When you have reached the last page of the online help the button is hidden History When you use this button a window opens which displays all of the help topics that are already open The topic title refers to the title of a chapter from paper documentation This topic title always remains visible even if in the case of long documents the text is moved in the window The Navigator is in the topic title It serves as a navigator inside the help projects A jump can be recognized by the fact it is written in green and is underlined When you click on a jump the help text corresponding to this key word topic appears Jumps correspond to related topics entries in paper documents the pages are however removed for your convenience The invoked help text is then replaced by a new help text 676 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Windows interface Popup A popup can be recognized by the fact it is written in green and has a dotted line under it When you click on a popup the help text corresponding to this key word appears Popups correspond to glossary entries in paper documents however the pages here are removed for your convenience To display the text a popup window is opened This popup window m
210. he Ethernet MBX driver is installed Modbus Plus function is emulated via TCP IP This driver also supports the program interfaces MBXAPI and NETLIB This means that practically all Modbus Plus compatible software programs immediately have access to TCP IP based communication without having to make changes This also includes 32 bit Windows 98 2000 NT applications and 16 bit old DOS Windows applications Note A detailed description of the driver is included on the CD MBX Driver Suite ver4 20 in the Help file EMBXNT Winsock API When using Winsock API the Ethernet MBX driver can solve certain critical problems created by the Winsock interface For example TCP Port 502 can only receive one process with incoming messages If several applications attempt to receive unexpected messages a conflict occurs The Ethernet MBX driver eliminated this problem by acting as global dispatcher for these messages When using the slave path Concept in Modbus Plus determines that several up to 256 applications refer to these unexpected messages and execute them simultaneously 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 869 Presettings for Modbus Plus Advantage of The most important advantages when using the driver via the Winsock API are using the driver e Changes are no longer needed for existing NETLIP NetBIOS MBXAPI compatible applications End user and developer software investments are completely secured e Consistent management and dis
211. he PLC with the DOS Loader program What s in this This chapter contains the following topics chapter Topic Page Quantum first startup with DOS Loader 934 Compact first startup with DOS Loader 937 Atrium first startup with DOS Loader 940 Momentum first startup for IEC with DOS Loader 943 Momentum first startup for LL984 with DOS Loader 946 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 933 Modbus Plus with DOS Loader Quantum first startup with DOS Loader Introduction This section describes the first startup of Quantum when used with Modbus Plus The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections e Start DOS Loader p 934 Define SA85 adapter p 934 Protocol settings p 935 Select EXEC file p 935 Load EXEC file p 936 Start DOS Loader procedure for launching DOS Loaders is as follows Step Action 1 If the CPU display Run is lit stop the program with Concept in main menu Online Response The Run display is no longer lit the Ready is now lit 2 Open the directory DAT CONCEPT DAT Double click on the file LOADER EXE Response The installation program for the Executive file EXEC is started 4 Select the option Communication Parameters Response The dialog box Communication setup is opened 5 Select the Modbus Plusoption Response The Modbus Plus communication setup window is opened Define SA85 Carry out the
212. he dialog box Communication setup is opened 5 Select the Modbus Plus option Response The Modbus Plus communication setup window is opened 946 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus Plus with DOS Loader Define SA85 Carry out the following steps to define the LAN address set in the CONFIG SYS file adapter Step Action 1 Select the adapter address you set when installing the SA85 in the CONFIG SYS file Parameter n Confirm your selection with RETURN Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus Plus protocol settings Step Action 1 Enter in Enter First Routing Path the node address set on the CPU using a rotary switch on the back of the module Confirm the entry with RETURN Response The option Enter second Routing Path appears Acknowledge the option with RETURN Response The window for selecting the TARGET PATH appears Select the TARGET PATH 1 option Enter in Enter Software Interrupt gt the Interrupt 5c or 5d selected in the CONFIG SYS file Select the ACCEPT CHANGES option Response You return to the main menu Select EXEC file out the following steps to select the EXEC file Step Action 1 Select the option File Selection Response The File Selection window is opened Click on the BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired programming language See
213. hernet specify coupling modules 86 Symbols 679 687 688 Syntax Data type editor 473 Derived Data Type 473 Syntax check IL 311 ST 357 T Tag IL 272 TCP IP Network Configuration 823 TCP IP network link 530 TCP IP Ethernet specify coupling modules 86 Text Object FBD 174 LD 203 SFC 234 Tool bar 681 682 683 684 686 690 Tools 15 Trace LL984 375 Transfer problems Modbus Presettings 877 Transition 225 alias designations 248 declare 246 process 246 Transition diagnosis 260 Transition section 226 Transition variable 227 U UDEFB FBD 172 LD 199 Unconditional Configuration 71 precondition 72 Unconditional locking of a section 494 Undo LL984 371 Uploading the PLC 551 User defined Elementary Function FBD 172 LD 199 Utilities 15 Utility program 15 Index V Variable Export 567 start behavior 35 Variable Editor Declaration 448 Exporting located variables 457 Search and Replace 450 searching and pasting 454 Variable storage settings in the INI file 956 Variables 34 ASCII message editor 504 Import 587 590 594 LL984 370 import 588 Variables editor 447 General 448 VARINOUT variables 397 Various PLC settings 52 Virtual MBX Driver Modbus Plus 866 W Waiting step 221 Warm start 35 Window 661 Window elements 663 Window types 662 Windows 659 Check box 670 Command buttons 669 Dialog boxes 668 Lists 669 Menu commands 666
214. il References have the prefix 0 e g 000001 Input Register References have the prefix 3 e g 300001 and Output Register References have the prefix 4 e g 400001 Response The end reference of the available address range In End or Out End column is entered automatically 782 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Dialog Following module mapping and I O reference specification the dialog looks like this Representation Local Quantum Drop Drop r Module Modules 7 ASCII Port No None v Input bits 0 Params Input bits 176 Output bits 0 eee ro Output bits 96 Status table Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste Rack Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description amp 1 1 CPS 214 00 DC SUMMABLE PS 2 1 2 CPU x13 0x CPU 1xMB 1 3 DDI 353 00 100001 100032 DC IN 24V 4x8 1 4 DDO 353 00 000001 000032 DC OUT 24V 4x8 1 5 AVI 030 00 300001 300009 AN IN 8CH BIPOLAR 1 6 AVO 020 00 400001 400004 AN OUT 4CH VOLT 811 00 PROFIBUS DP 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 y 4 OK Cancel Help Poll Parameter To parameterize the individual modules proceed as follows in the Local Quantum ization of Drop dialog Modules
215. index value declares with what word the assignment shall start in this case with the first word The BIN BCD column gives you the choice of getting the global data formatted either into the usual binary format or into binary coded decimals The index value may not be higher than 32 since every node can provide a maximum of 32 word only for global output data The lenght value may also not be higher than 32 for the same reason Close the dialog box Global Input with the command button OK 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 795 Configuration examples Global Output For Global Output proceed as follows Step Action 1 Open the dialog box Gobal Output by clicking the command button Output in the area Global 2 Enter the Source register the length and the Bin BCD Code in the text field of the dialog box as shown in the figure Representation of the dialog box Global Output Range 300001 300512 1 32 Dest Node Source Ref Length Bin BCD All Nodes 300020 10 BIN Y OK Cancel Help 3 Close the dialog box Global Output with the command button OK 796 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Specific data transfer Specific Input For Specific Input proceed as follows Step Action 1 For specific data transfer open the dialog box Specific Input by clicking the command b
216. ing chapter in the Phoenix user manual Preconditions The serial interface of the host computer and the diagnostic interface of a PC 104 board must be linked with a V24 cable Implementing Before you import the configuration into Concept carry out the following settings in Export Settings the CMD tool Step Action 1 Select Configuration Controller Board Data Type Select IBS PC104 SC T and confirm the selection using OK 3 Select File Operating State Response The Operating State dialog is opened 4 Activate the Configuration Online option button and exit the dialog using OK Under Configuration Controller Board Control select the command Activate Configuration Frame Confirm with Yes Response A configuration frame is generated 6 Select Configuration gt Configuration Frame Read Again Response The configuration is read into the frame 7 Under Configuration Parameterization Memory Write ASCII File select the command INTERBUS Data SVC Response The INTERBUS data is stored in a file Enter the directory and the file name in the open dialog and confirm using OK Select File Save As Response The INTERBUS project is saved 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 805 Configuration examples Editing Local Drop Introduction This section describes the configuration of the first local drop The processing sequence begins
217. ing module mapping and I O reference specification the dialog looks like this Local Quantum Drop Drop Module Modules 7 ASCII Port No None w Input bits 0 Params Input bits 176 Output bits 0 ERE Output bits 96 Status table Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste Rack Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description 1 1 CPS 214 00 DC SUMMABLE PS 2 1 2 CPU x13 0x CPU 1xMB 1 3 DDI 353 00 100001 100032 DC IN 24V 4x8 1 4 DDO 353 00 000001 000032 DC OUT 24V 4x8 1 5 AVI 030 00 300001 300009 AN IN 8CH BIPOLAR 1 6 AVO 020 00 400001 400004 AN OUT 4CH VOLT CPR 93x 00 RIO Head S908 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 Y 4 gt OK Cancel Help Poll Set module To set parameters for the individual modules proceed as follows in the Local parameters Quantum Drop dialog Step Action 1 From the Rack Slot column select the 1 3 line Response The 1 3 text box has a dark background i e the DDI 353 00 module has been selected for editing Note Parameters are not set for the CPS 214 00 and CPU x13 0x modules Select the Params command button Response The 140 DDI 353 00 dialog is opened Select the Discrete option button Response You return to the I O map Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example Note The modules are sometimes set with different parameters Help with this can be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog 840 USE 493
218. ing that the env file does not reference a CFG file All other files are optional By forcing you to enter the Modsoft env filename some of the validation is avoided that would otherwise be required if you were allowed to enter a prg and cfg name separately i e Loadables DX User and EXE state ram and builtin functions Due to differences in address calculations in the configuration table between Modsoft 2 6 and Concept 2 2 or later the same Modsoft program loaded in a PLC and converted using the Modsoft Converter will cause a configuration miscompare in certain page zero locations This will not affect the validity of the converted program 850 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Convertion of Modsoft Programs Invalid PLC Types Handling of SY MAX Modsoft Version Handling of SFC and Macros Handling of I O Map Handling of References If the Modsoft configuration file PLC type is not legal for Concept you are warned that the convert process will not continue You then have to return to Modsoft and change the PLC type to one that is valid SY MAX programs converted to Modsoft file format will migrate to the Quantum PLC type The Modsoft Convert utility can then bring the SY MAX program into Concept The Convert utility handles Modsoft file format supported in revision 2 2 or greater Modsoft does allow the user to save a Ladder Logic program that consists of undefined elements and Conc
219. ing topics ion section Topic Page Window Types 662 Elements of a window 663 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 661 Windows interface Window Types Introduction In Windows there are two types of windows e Application Window e Document Window Types of window Application window project Concept File Edit View Objects Project Online Options Window Help 3c ota eat T P amp 81 1 E lop 9 iR PLC configuration Be m PLC PLC Selection Type 140 CPU 113 02 Available Logic Area 8191 PLC Memory Partition Disable IEC library Loadables Specials r PLC Memory Partition r Loadables Config Extensions Coils 000001 001536 Number installed 0 B 10 Map Discrete Inputs 100001 101872 E Segment Scheduler Input words 300001 300512 B Modbus port settings Output marker words 400001 401872 3 ASCII r Specials Battery coil 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Timer Registi i Time of day
220. ins the power grid on the left side and when connected to activated objects the power shifts from left to right Landscape Landscape means that when looking at the printed text the page is wider than it is high 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 973 Glossary Language Element Library Link Literals Local derived data types Local DFBs Local Link Local macros Local network nodes Located variable Every basic element in one of the IEC programming languages e g a step in SFC a function block instance in FBD or the initial value of a variable Collection of software objects which are intended for re use when programming new projects or even building new libraries Examples are the libraries of the Elementary function block types EFB libraries can be divided up into Groups A control or data flow connection between graphical objects e g steps in the SFC Editor function blocks in the FBD Editor within a section represented graphically as a line Literals are used to provide FFB inputs and transition conditions etc using direct values These values can not be overwritten by the program logic read only A distinction is made between generic and standardized literals Literals are also used to allocate a constant a value or a variable an initial value Entries are made as base 2 literal base 8 literal basis 16 literal integer literal real literal or real literal with exponent Local derived d
221. ion Overview This chapter describes loading executive data EXEC onto the PLC with the EXECLoader program What s in this This chapter contains the following topics chapter Topic Page Quantum first startup with EXECLoader 880 Compact first startup with EXECLoader 884 Momentum first startup for IEC with EXECLoader 888 Momentum first startup for LL984 with EXECLoader 893 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 879 Modbus with EXECLoader Quantum first startup with EXECLoader Introduction Start EXECLoader Define Modbus interface This section describes the first startup of Quantum when used with Modbus The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections e Start EXECLoader p 880 Define Modbus interface p 880 Protocol settings p 881 Select EXEC file p 882 Load EXEC file p 882 The procedure for launching EXECLoaders is as follows Step Action 1 Open the Concept start menu Response All installed Concept programs are displayed as symbols 2 Click on the symbol with the identifier EXECLoader Response The EXECLoader program is started 3 Click on the command Next as soon as you have read the information on the page Response The dialog Communication Protocol is opened Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus interface Step Action 1 Select the Option button Modbus RTU RS232 for the RTU transfer mode Select th
222. irectory will not be overwritten Advantage No impact on other projects as the global DFBs in these projects are not overwritten Disadvantage Multiple copies of global DFBs Note Also read the sections entitled How are Global DFBs Stored 958 and How are Global DFBs Read p 958 PreserveGlobalDFBs 0 During the upload process global DFBs are downloaded into the Concept DFB directory Different versions of duplicated DFBs are recognized and overwritten after being queried Advantage Only one copy of global DFBs for several projects Disadvantage Existing global DFBs whose versions differ from the uploaded DFBs are overwritten This can cause other projects to be inconsistent in certain circumstances Note Also read the sections entitled How are Global DFBs Stored 958 and How are Global DFBs Read p 958 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 957 CONCEPT INI How are Global Storage of global DFBs depends on the settings in the INI file DFB s Stored If a project then the global DFBs are is newly created and no new DFB path has stored in the x CONCEPT DFB directory been defined in the INI file is newly created and a new DFB path has stored in the DFB directory defined in the path been defined in the INI file is uploaded and the following settings exist stored in the DFB directory defined in the path in the INI file x DFB the Path option Gl
223. keywords which are used in the IEC 1131 3 and therefore in Concept are listed in Appendix C of the IEC 1131 3 These keywords may not be used for any other purpose i e not as variable names section names instance names etc L Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram is a graphic programming dialog according to EC 1131 which is LD optically oriented to the rung of a relay contact plan Ladder Logic 984 terms Ladder Logic and Ladder Diagram refer to the word Ladder being LL executed In contrast to a circuit diagram a ladder diagram is used by electrotech nicians to display an electrical circuit using electrical symbols which should show the course of events and not the existing wires which connect the parts with each other A usual user interface for controlling the actions of automation devices permits a Ladder Diagram interface so that electrotechnicians do not have to learn new programming languages to be able to implement a control program The structure of the actual Ladder Diagram enables the connection of electric elements in such a way that generates a control output which is dependant upon a logical power flow through used electrical objects which displays the previously requested condition of a physical electrical device In simple form the user interface is a video display processed by the PLC programming application which sets up vertical and horizontal grid in which programming objects are classified The diagram conta
224. lable address range is automatically entered 834 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Dialog display Following module mapping and I O reference specification the dialog looks like this Local Momentum Drop Drop Module Modules 1 Input bits 80 Input bits 80 Output bits 80 Params Output bits 80 Status table Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description AMM 090 00 300001 300008 400001 400005 BASE ANALOG 4CH 4 4 gt OK Cancel Help Poll Set module To set parameters for the individual modules proceed as follows in the Local parameters Momentum Drop dialog Step Action 1 Select the Params command button Response The 170 AMM 090 00 dialog is opened 2 Select the signal states for the input and output channels from the list boxes and exit the dialog using OK Note Help with this can be obtained from the corresponding help text in the parameter dialog Dialog display 170 AMM 090 00 Eingangs Auswahl Ausgangs Auswahl Kanal 1 1 5V oder 4 20mA v Kanal 1 Ausgang v Kanal 2 1 5 oder 4 20mA v Kanal 1 R ckfall 0MA bis 20mA 10 V bis 1
225. le LOADER EXE Response The installation program for the Executive file EXEC is started 4 Select the option Communication Parameters Response The dialog box Communication setup is opened 5 Select the Modbus option Response The Modbus communication setup window is opened Define Modbus Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus interface interf tertace Step Action 1 Select the programming cable interface on the PC default setting is COM1 2 Select the Baudrate default is 9600 3 Select the parity default is EVEN 4 Select the Option button RTU 8 Bits for the RTU transfer mode Select the option ASCII 7 Bits for the ASCII transfer mode 5 Select the Stop bits default is 1 Note Data transfer can only take place if you have configured the same transfer mode ASCII or RTU on the CPU using a button on the front of the module 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 903 Modbus with DOS Loader Protocol settings Select EXEC file Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus protocol Step Action 1 Enter in Enter PLC Address the node address set on the CPU using a rotary switch on the back of the module 2 Select the TARGET PATH 0 option Select the ACCEPT CHANGES option Response You return to the main menu Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file Step Action 1 Select the option File Selection Response The
226. le map 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 737 Configuration examples Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the Local Modules and Quantum Drop dialog Specifying I O Step Keien References 1 Select the Module column Response The I O Module Selection dialog is opened 2 From the Category column select the all option Response All modules are listed in the Modules column 3 In the Modules column select the CPS 214 00 module Exit the dialog with OK Response The module is inserted in the I O map 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example see Local Quantum Drop dialog representation 5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns set the start references for the input and output modules Note Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 e g 100001 Coil References have the prefix 0 e g 000001 Input Register References have the prefix 3 e g 300001 and Output Register References have the prefix 4 e g 400001 Response The end reference column In End or Out End of the available address range is automatically entered 738 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples
227. les irrespective of type are set to 0 or if available their initial value Warm start In a warm start stopping and starting the program or Online Load changes different start behaviors are valid for located variables direct addresses and unlocated variables e Located variables direct addresses In a warm start all Ox 1x and 3x registers are set to 0 or if available their initial value 4x registers retain their current value storage behavior e Unlocated variables In a warm start all unlocated variables retain their current value storing behavior This varying behavior in a warm start leads to peculiarities in the warm start behavior of set and reset functions e Set and Reset in LD and IL Warm start behavior is dependent on the variable type used storage behavior in use of unlocated variables non storage behavior in use of located variables direct addresses SR and RS Function Blocks in FBD LD IL and ST These Function Blocks work with internal unlocated variables and therefore always have a storage behavior 724 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 IEC conformity Implementation dependent parameters IEC standards table IEC standards table for implementation dependent parameters Parameters Threshold values behavior Error handling procedure See Error causes p 728 amp EFB help National characters used All characters in the Windows ANSI character set are supported Maximum length
228. literal or base 16 literal The length of the data element is 16 bits A numerical value range can not be assigned to this data type 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 983 Glossary 984 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Index mo Symbols gt Assignment 306 354 General information about online functions 517 SFCSTEP STATE variable 223 SFCSTEP TIMES variable 222 Step variable 223 A Access Rights 627 634 635 Action 223 Action variable 224 Actions Process 241 Activate dialogs 86 Actual parameters FBD 173 LD 201 Alias designations step 248 transition 248 Alternative branch 230 Alternative connection 232 Animation 495 615 617 General information 555 IEC section 556 IL 315 318 LL984 section 557 Section 555 FBD 181 LD 210 SFC 252 255 ANY Outputs 351 Archive DFB 610 EFB 610 project 610 ASCII message editor 499 501 506 Combination mode 514 Control code 505 Direct mode 514 Flush buffer 507 Generals 502 How to continue after getting a warning 513 How to Use 510 Message Number 511 Message text 512 Offline mode 514 Repeat 508 Simulation text 512 Spaces 505 Text 503 User interface 509 510 Variables 504 ASCII messages 52 85 Assign instructions ST 336 Atrium INTERBUS controller 806 810 Atrium configuration example INTERBUS controller 804 Index Atrium first startup DOS Loader 940 EXECLoader 922 Modbus P
229. llowing Step Action 1 Move the gray field onto the cell containing the in output 2 To allocate variables to inputs press Ctrl Enter To allocate variables to outputs press Ctrl Enter Reaction The Dialog connect FFB of the selected in output is opened 702 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 List of symbols and short cut keys Changing variables onto an FFB Deleting vertical links Moving the mouse pointer Scrolling To change variables onto an FFB do the following Step Action 1 Move the gray field onto the cell containing the variable to be changed 2 To select the variable press Shift Enter Reaction The Dialog connect FFB of the selected in output is opened To delete vertical variables carry out the following step Step Action 1 Move the gray field onto the cell running through the vertical link 2 Press Ctrl Delete Reaction The vertical link is deleted Moving the mouse pointer Key Function Ctrl Up Moving the mouse pointer up by one step Ctrl Down Moving the mouse pointer down by one step Ctrl Right Moving the mouse pointer to the right by one step Ctrl Left Moving the mouse pointer to the left by one step Scrolling Key Function Picture up Scrolls the display sector one page up Shift Picture up Scrolls the display sector one page up Picture down Scrolls the display sector one
230. lus The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections e Start EXECLoader p 914 Define SA85 adapter p 914 Protocol settings p 915 Select EXEC file p 916 Load EXEC file p 916 Start The procedure for launching EXECLoaders is as follows EXECLoader Step Action 1 Open the Concept start menu Response All installed Concept programs are displayed as symbols 2 Click on the symbol with the identifier EXECLoader Response The EXECLoader program is started 3 Click on the command Next as soon as you have read the information on the page Response The dialog Communication Protocol is opened Define SA85 Carry out the following steps to define the LAN address set in the CONFIG SYS file adapter Step Action 1 Select the option button Modbus Plus 2 Click on the command button Next Response The Modbus Plus Target dialog is opened 3 Select from the list Devices Online the adapter address you set when installing the SA85 in the CONFIG SYS file Parameter n 914 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus Plus with EXECLoader Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus Plus protocol settings Step Action 1 Click on the command button Scan Response The nodes on the Modbus Plus network are read and displayed graphically in the left window A green point in the graphic indicates that the CPU is in RUN mode To stop the CPU continue as des
231. lus 922 940 Available functions in OFFLINE and ONLINE modes 69 B Backplane Expander Edit I O Map 92 Error handling 93 Generals 92 Backplane Expander Config Configure 91 Block call up IL 301 ST 350 308 DFB 300 FFB 300 Chain jump 229 Chain loop 229 Change coil LD 206 contact LD 206 FFB FBD 177 FFB LD 206 Change set PLC password 539 Changing signal states of a Located variable Reference data editor 491 Close Column LL984 372 Closer LD 192 Code generation IL 312 ST 358 Code generation FBD 180 LD 209 Coil change LD 206 replace LD 206 Coil negated LD 194 Coil negative edge LD 195 Coil positive edge LD 194 Coil reset LD 195 Coil set LD 195 Coils LD 193 Cold start 35 Color definition INI file 960 Comments Data type editor 481 Derived data type 481 Communication 14 Compact configuration RTU extension 99 Compact configuration example Compact controller 799 Compact first startup DOS Loader 903 937 EXECLoader 884 918 Modbus 884 903 Modbus Plus 918 937 Concept DFB 389 425 Concept ModConnect 841 Integrating new Modules 845 Removing modules 846 Use of Third Party Modules in Concept 847 Concept PLCSIM32 617 Concept Security 625 626 627 634 635 Concept SIM 615 CONCEPT INI 953 general 954 LD section settings 959 path for global DFBs 957 path for help files 957 print settings 955 Index
232. mation 488 Reference Offset LL984 371 Reference Zoom LL984 373 References LL984 370 Register address format settings in the INI file 956 Remote control with DIO Quantum configuration example 754 Remote control with RIO 740 Quantum configuration example 735 Remote control with RIO series 800 748 751 Quantum configuration example 743 Remote controller with I O bus Momentum 814 818 xiii Index Remote bus Momentum configuration example 813 Remote MBX Driver Modbus Plus 868 Replace coil LD 206 contact LD 206 FFB FBD 177 FFB LD 206 Replace References LL984 375 Replacing variable names Reference data editor 497 Requirements LL984 368 RTU extension Compact configuration 99 Configure 99 S Save To Flash 536 Scan constant 533 Scan times single 534 Search and Replace Variable names and addresses 450 Searching and pasting variable names and addresses 454 Searching and pasting variable names and Addresses 454 Section 38 Animation 555 Execution sequence 38 Export 564 Import 568 572 583 584 585 import 569 LL 984 365 Lock 39 Status 663 import 580 Security 625 626 627 634 635 Segement LL984 365 Segment manager 80 Select LL984 372 Select process information General information 543 Status and memory 542 Selecting process information Status and memory 542 Separators data type editor 480 derived data type 480 Setting up and controlling the
233. mode To stop the CPU continue as described in step 3 Double click on the read network node in the graphical display Response The Modbus address of the node is automatically entered in the textfeld Modbus Address Click the right mouse button in the left window Response A context menu with individual PLC commands is opened If the Run display is lit on the CPU stop the program using the command Stop PLC Response A message window appears where you can click OK to confirm Stopping the CPU Click the command button OK to confirm stopping the CPU Response You return to the dialog Modbus Target RTU mode and the green point disappears from the graph Activate the check box Bridge if the connection to the Modbus node should be made via a Modbus Plus network using a Modbus bridge Press the appropriate Option button for your system PLC Direct Device Local Head Remote I O Drop Click on the command button Next Response The Operation dialog is opened 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 885 Modbus with EXECLoader Select EXEC file Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file Step Action 1 Press the Option button Transfer EXEC to Device 2 Click on the command button Browse Response The Concept directory is opened in a standard window 3 Double click on the DAT directory Response All available BIN files ar
234. modes Key Function Space character Activates the selection mode Esc Activates the selection mode H Activates the link mode 1 Activates the mode for inverting in outputs T Activates the text mode 704 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 List of symbols and short cut keys Short Cut Keys in the LL984 Editor Short Cut Keys The table shows the additional short cut keys available in the LL984 editor and the corresponding menu entry commands see also General Short Cut Keys p 692 Short Cut Keys Menu Entry Command Executed Ctrl Z Edit Reverse Delete Ctrl X Edit Cut Ctrl C Edit Copy Ctrl V Edit Add Del Edit Delete Ctrl D Edit DX Zoom Ctrl H Edit Offset References Ctrl O Display Overview Ctrl N Display Normal Ctrl E Display Expand Ctrl Display Enlarge Ctrl Display Reduce Objects Coil Ctrl L Objects Coil buffered P Objects Contact Objects Contact Open P Objects Contact Positive Edge N Objects Contact Negative Edge Objects Horizontal Link l Objects Vertical Link Ctrl F Objects Instruction by name Ctrl G Network Go to Ctrl l Networks Add Ctrl Q Networks Add formula Ctrl A Networks Attach Ctrl U Networks Attach
235. mples Defining Drops To define drops proceed as follows in the PLC Configuration window Step Action 1 Select PLC Selection Response The PLC selection dialog is opened 2 Select the PLC family Momentum and CPU 171 CCC 960 20 IEC Use OK return to the PLC Configuration window 3 Select I O Map Response The I O Map dialog is opened and the first drop is automatically entered in the table 4 Select the drop from the Drop column Select the Edit command button Response You reach the module map Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the Local Modules and Quantum Drop dialog Specifying I O Step Aion References 1 Select the Module column Response The I O Module Selection dialog is opened 2 From the Category column select the all option Response All modules are listed in the Modules column 3 Select from the column Modules the module AMM 090 00 Exit the dialog with OK Response The module is inserted in the I O map 4 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns set the start references for the input and output modules Note Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 e g 100001 Coil References have the prefix 0 e g 000001 Input Register References have the prefix 3 e g 300001 and Output Register References have the prefix 4 e g 400001 Response The end reference column In End or Out End of the avai
236. n 1 Click on the command button Transfer Response A message box appears warning you that all data available on the PLC will be lost and the configuration and program must be reloaded on the PLC Click on the command button Yes to continue the transfer Response The Progress dialog is opened This gives information about the progress of the transfer in a progress bar and text Click Close once the transfer is complete Response The dialog is closed and you return to the dialog Summary Click on the command button Close to close the EXECLoader 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 927 Modbus Plus with EXECLoader CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows during transfer LED Response Run slow flashing COM ACT not lit Modbus fast flashing CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows transfer LED Response Run not lit COM ACT not lit Modbus fast flashing Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project p 43 software connection Note If you recieve an error message close Concept and start the BDRESET EXE file in the Concept directory to reset the SA85 Then start again from the first step 928 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus Plus with EXECLoader Momentum first startup for LL984 with EXECLoader Introduction This section describes th
237. n it should be ensured that sufficient memory is available To optimize storage occupancy open the dialog PLC Memory Partition PLC Configuration PLC Memory Partition When editing the first local drop the modules must be set with their I O references before the individual modules can be parameterized Quantum Profibus DP controller D 2 A A MER C C DID A AIC PIPDIDIVIVR PROFIBUS wm 5001 1 Device data base for CRP 811 00 load onto SyCon 2 Host computer for Concept and SyCon 3 V24cable 4 Local Quantum drop 1 5 RIO master module 6 Profibus DP configuration External modules 780 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Defining Drops To define drops proceed as follows in the PLC Configuration window Step Action 1 Select PLC Selection Response The PLC Selection dialog is opened 2 Select the Quantum PLC family and a CPU x113 xx Using OK return to the PLC Configuration window 3 Select Config Extensions Select Extensions list Response The Select Extensions dialog is opened 4 In the Profibus DP list box select the 1 option Response The coupling mod
238. n Monitoring and Diagnostic Software Defining Drops To define drops proceed as follows in the PLC Configuration window Step Action 1 Select PLC Selection Response The PLC selection dialog is opened Select the Quantum PLC family and a CPU x113 xx Use OK return to the PLC Configuration window Select I O Map Response The I O Map dialog is opened and the first drop is automatically entered in the table Dialog display VO Map Reserve for 144 4 Insert Delete Go To Local RIO slot v Cut Copy Paste Drop Type Supervision Timeln bits Out bits Status Edit 1 Quantum I O 3 0 0 Edit 1 insert at the end of the list select this line Remote I O OK Cancel Help Select the drop from the Drop column Select the Edit command button Response You reach the module map 766 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the Local Modules and Quantum Drop dialog Specifying I O Step Action References 1 Select the Module column Response The I O Module Selection dialog is opened 2 From the Category column select the lt all gt option Response All modules are listed in the Module
239. n the program DINT stands for the data type double length whole number double integer Entries are made as integer literal base 2 literal basis 8 literal or base 16 literal The length of the data element is 32 bits The value range for variables of this datatype reaches from 2 exp 31 to 2 exp 31 1 A method of displaying variables in the PLC program from which the assignment to the logical memory can be directly and indirectly to the physical memory derived A window within an application window Several document windows can be open at the same time in an application window However only one document window can ever be active Document windows in Concept are for example sections the message window the reference data editor and the PLC configuration DP Remote Peripheral An empty file which consists of a text heading with general file information such as author date of creation EFB designation etc The user must complete this dummy file with further entries This property enables the user to connect to a programming object to monitor and if necessary change its data value EFB code Elementary functions function blocks EFB The EFB code is the section s EFB code which can be executed In addition the used EFBs count in DFBs Identifier for Functions or Function blocks whose type definitions are not formulated in one of the IEC languages i e whose body for example can not be modified with
240. n to the main menu Select EXEC file out the following steps to select the EXEC file Step Action 1 Select the option File Selection Response The File Selection window is opened Click on the BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired programming language See the table Loading Firmware for Atrium PLC Types p 952 Confirm your selection with RETURN Response You return to the main menu 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 941 Modbus Plus with DOS Loader Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM Step Action 1 Select the option Load File To PLC Response The Loading Process window is opened and the warning The PROGRAM contents of the device being loaded could be lost after loading a new Executive The CONTENTS stored in the Micro H H P will always be lost after loading a new Executive Would you like to continue Y N N is displayed 2 Acknowledge the warning with Y Response The message Node failed to enter normal mode appears 3 The DOWNLOAD PROGRESS window appears which shows the transfer rate Response After the transfer is complete the message Download Operation Successful appears 4 Confirm the message with RETURN Response You return to the main menu 5 Select the Exit Program option Response The DOS Loader is exited Creating the Carry out the
241. ndards table for common graphic elements tanie Table Property Property description number number 57 2 Horizontal lines Graphic or semi graphic 57 4 Vertical lines Graphic or semi graphic 57 6 Horizontal vertical connection Graphic or semi graphic 57 8 Line intersection without connection Graphic or semi graphic 57 10 Connected and unconnected corners Graphic or semi graphic 57 12 Blocks with connecting lines Graphic or semi graphic 722 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 IEC conformity LD KOP language elements IEC standards IEC standards table for LD KOP language elements Table Property Property description number number 59 1 Left power rail with linked horizontal connection 60 1 Horizontal connection 60 2 Vertical connection with linked horizontal connections 61 1 Closer 61 3 Opener 61 5 Contact for detection of positive transition 61 7 Contact for detection of negative transition 62 1 Coil Note 1 p 724 62 2 Negative coil Note 1 p 724 62 3 SET coil Note 1 p 724 62 4 RESET coil Note 1 p 724 62 8 Coil for detection of positive transition 62 9 Coil for detection of negative transition 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 723 IEC conformity Note 1 In start behavior of PLCs there is a distinction between cold starts and warm starts e Cold start Following a cold start loading the program with Online Load all variab
242. neral icon bar p 682 Symbol Menu entry command executed View Enlarge View Reduce Objects Selection mode Objects Select column structure Objects Select row structure Objects Step t Objects Transition imi Objects Parallel branch Objects Parallel merge Objects Alternative branch Ee Objects Alternative merge gt Objects Jump KH Objects Link Objects Step transition sequence Objects Structured parallel chain Ez Objects Structured alternative chain 684 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 List of symbols and short cut keys Symbol Menu entry command executed Objects Transition step sequence Objects Text Online Animation Online Animation control command 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 685 List of symbols and short cut keys Icon bar in the LD editor Symbols The table shows the additional symbols available in the LD editor and the corresponding menu entry commands please also refer to the General icon bar p 682 Symbol Menu entry command executed View Enlarge E View Reduce Objects Select Mode HE Objects Link Objects Direct Link Hi Objects Vertical Link EH Objects FFB Last Type EI Objects Invert Input Output Objects Text 38 Objects Select FFB o Objects Coil
243. nline Reference Data Editor Shift F5 Window Overlapping Shift F4 Window Adjacent 692 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 List of symbols and short cut keys Short Cut Keys in the IL ST and Data Type Editor Calling up menu table shows the short cut keys available in the IL ST and Data Type Editor and command the corresponding menu entry commands see also General Short Cut Keys entries p 692 Key Menu Entry Command Executed Ctrl Z Edit Reverse Delete Ctrl X Edit Cut Ctrl C Edit Copy Ctrl V Edit Add Del Edit Delete Ctrl G Edit Go to line Ctrl J Edit Go to opposite part Ctrl E Edit Expand instruction Alt F8 Edit Search for variables Ctrl F Edit Advanced search Ctrl H Edit Replace Ctrl Y Online Animate binary values Ctrl l Online Check Selections Ctrl W Online View Selections Moving insertion Moving insertion marks in the text marks in the text Key Moving Down Onto the next line Up Onto the previous line Ctrl G Onto a specific line End To the end of the line Home To the beginning of the line Picture up Into the next window Picture up Into the previous window Ctrl Right To the next word Cirl Left To the previous word Ctrl End To the end of the document Ctrl Home To the beginning of the document 840 USE 493
244. nt windows are for example sections in which a user program is created or the document window of the PLC configuration Several document windows can be open simultaneously but only one of these can be active An active document window can be recognized by the color of the title bar Depending on the active document window the menu commands change in the pull down menus and the tool bar of the application window Elements of a window At a Glance This section describes the Concept specific elements of a window Elements of a window Toolbar Menu bar Title bar project Title bar section File Edit View Objects Project Online Options Window Help Di cS ota e i and 2 oye X 1 i Mm i 1 2 saith xe LampTest2 5 4 i i i 1 5 6 1 ta EAE FB1 2 3 EUM EE ERIS ues o 1 gt 1 3 SFC i T 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Vr sre ool 1 1 1 1 6 1317 1 Pus Mi 8999
245. ntax and Semantics LL984 383 Error handling Backplane Expander 93 Establishing the hardware connection Modbus Plus presettings 871 Modbus presettings 876 Ethernet 530 Ethernet I O Scanner Configurator 100 How to use the Ethernet I O Scanner 104 Ethernet bus system Momentum configuration example 821 Ethernet bus system Momentum 822 Ethernet MBX Driver Driver for Modbus Plus Function via TCP IP 869 Ethernet with Atrium 99 ethernet with Momentum 99 Ethernet with Quantum 98 Example Profibus DP controller 778 INTERBUS Controller with Atrium 805 Example of hardware configuration Remote control with RIO Series 800 743 Compact controller 799 Ethernet bus system 821 INTERBUS control 763 INTERBUS controller 804 Profibus DP controller 777 remote control with DIO 754 remote control with RIO 735 remote I O bus 813 SY MAX controller 769 Example to Peer Cop 791 Examples of hardware configuration 733 Exchange Marking Macro 430 EXEC file CPU 424 02 117 CPU X13 0X 117 Momentum 152 EXEC files 949 Index EXECLoader Atrium first startup 922 Compact first startup 884 918 Momentum first startup 888 893 925 929 Quantum first startup 880 914 Startup when using Modbus 879 Startup when using Modbus Plus 913 Execution order FBD 177 Execution sequence LD 207 Section 38 Export 561 Derived Data Type 567 PLC Configuration 597 Section 564 Variable 567 general information 563
246. o enable Peer Cop communication via functionality the SA85 adapter The Peer Cop function is deactivated as standard and should only be released if your application requires Peer Cop communication Torelease and set parameters for Peer Cop communication start with the first steps as with Edit SA85 Configuration In the dialog box SA85 Configuration select the register Peer Cop and make your settings 864 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Presettings for Modbus Plus Installing the Modbus Plus Driver in Windows 98 2000 NT Introduction Installation Configuration In order to use the Modbus Plus communication you must first install the CyberLogic MBX driver for Windows 98 2000 NT version gt 4 20 Service Release 1 for Windows 2000 The following drivers are available on the CD MBX Driver Suite v4 20 Driver Operating system MBX Driver MBX Driver for connection between ModConnect Host interface adapters and 32 bit applications with Windows 98 2000 NT p 867 Windows 98 2000 NT Virtual MBX Driver Virtual MBX Driver for 16 bit application capability with Windows 98 2000 NT p 866 Windows 98 2000 NT Remote MBX Driver Remote MBX Driver for Remote Operation p 868 Windows 98 2000 NT Ethernet MBX Driver Ethernet MBX Driver for Modbus Plus Function via TCP IP p 869 Windows NT Carry out the following steps to install the Modbus Plus driver Step A
247. obalDFBPath x DFB the Upload option PreserveGlobalDFBs 0 is uploaded and the following settings exist stored in the project s GLB directory in the INI file Note The GLB directory is always used first as the Path option soon as the PreserveGlobalDFBs 1 Upload GlobalDFBPath x DFB option is specified the Upload option PreserveGlobalDFBs 1 How are Global When a project is opened the system looks for DFBs in the following order DEBS Read Step Description 1 The project directory is searched for an existing GLB directory 2 The relevant settings are checked in the INI file For example Path GlobalDFBPath x DFB Upload PreserveGlobalDFBs 0 In this example the DFB directory of the path defined is searched for global DFBs 3 The DFB directory under x CONCEPT DFB is searched Only the global DFBs from one directory are used i e if step 1 is unsuccessful then step 2 follows step 3 is only performed if neither of the first two are successful 958 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 CONCEPT INI Representation of Internal Data in the INI File Representation of Internal Data The following keywords appear in the INI file and contain internal data according to specific Concept applications Debug Configurator Search Registration Register INI Settings for the LD Section Defining the Contact Connection Defining
248. odbus Plus Win 2000 Carry out the following steps to set the interface in Windows 2000 Interface setting Step Action 1 Select the Desktop symbol Response All available objects are displayed Select the Control Panel symbol Response All available objects are displayed Select the System symbol Response The System Properties dialog is opened Select the register card Hardware Select Device Manager Response The Device Manager is opened Select Connections COM and LPT Response The branch ECP Printer port LPT1 and communication port COMX are displayed Select communication connection COMXx Response The Properties for Communication connection COMx dialog is opened Select the register card Connection settings Select the Advanced command button Response The Advanced settingsCOMXx dialog is opened 10 Tick the check box Use FIFO buffer Note Using the FIFO First In First Out buffer requires a serial port with 16550 compatible UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter 11 Use the slide control to change the recieve and send buffer which are both set to maximum size 12 Close all dialogs with OK 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 875 Presetting for Modbus Plus Interface Settings in Windows NT Interface setting Carry out the following steps to set the interface in Windows NT Step Action
249. odule Selection dialog is opened 2 From the Category column select the lt all gt option Response All modules are listed in the Modules column 3 In the Modules column select the CRA 93x 00 module Exit the dialog with OK Response The module is inserted in the I O map 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example see dialog representation RIO Slot 7 Quantum Drop 2 5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns set the start references for the input and output modules Note Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 e g 100001 Coil References have the prefix 0 e g 000001 Input Register References have the prefix 3 e g 300001 and Output Register References have the prefix 4 e g 400001 Response The end reference column In End or Out End of the available address range is automatically entered 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 749 Configuration examples Dialog display Following module mapping and I O reference specification the dialog looks like this RIO slot 7 Quantum Drop 2 Drop Module Modules 5 ASCII Port No None w Input bits 0 Parame Input bits 176 Output bits 0 CRAT Output bits 96 Status table Previous Next Delete D
250. of identifiers Program name 8 Formal parameter names 8 DFB type names 8 EFB type names 17 Data type names 24 all others 32 Maximum comment length Limited only by Windows resources Range of values for time span literals Os to 49d 17h 2m 47 295s Range of values for variables of type TIME Os to 49d 17h 2m 47 295s Accuracy of the seconds display with types TIME OF DAY and DATE AND TIME not applicable Maximum number of field indices Practically no limit Maximum field size 64 kB Maximum number of structure elements Only limited by Windows or PLC resources Maximum structure size 64 kB Maximum number of variables per declaration Only limited by Windows or PLC resources Maximum number of enumerated values not applicable Default maximum length of STRING variables not applicable Maximum authorized length of STRING variables not applicable Maximum number of hierarchy tiers 1 Configured or physical illustration Configured illustration physical illustration through separate I O projection Parameters Threshold values behavior Maximum number of indices Practically no limit 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 725 IEC conformity Parameters Threshold values behavior Maximum range of index values Range of data type INT Maximum number of structure levels Only limited by Windows o
251. of storage locations and start values for fields Note 5 p 718 Note 11 p 718 18 Initialization of symbolic variables Note 5 p 718 18 Declaration and initialization of buffered variables Note 5 p 718 Note 11 p 718 18 Initialization of structured variables Note 5 p 718 18 Initialization of constants 19 1 Negated input 19 2 Negated output 20 1 Use of EN and ENO REQUIRED for LD Note 6 p 718 20 2 Use of EN and OPTIONAL for FBD 20 3 FBD without EN and ENO 21 2 Standardized functions Note 3 p 717 22 1 TO Type conversion functions Note 4 p 718 22 2 Truncation towards zero TRUNC Note 3 p 717 23 1 ABS Absolute value 23 2 SQRT Square root 23 3 LN Natural logarithm 23 4 LOG Base 10 logarithm 23 5 EXP Exponential function 23 6 SIN Sine input in radians 23 7 COS Cosine input in radians 23 8 TAN Tangent input in radians 23 9 ASIN Arc sine principal value 714 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 IEC conformity Table Property Property description number number 23 10 ACOS Arc cosine principal value 23 11 ATAN Arc tangent principal value 24 12 ADD Add 24 13 MUL Multiply 24 14 SUB Subtract 24 15 DIV Divide 24 16 MOD Modulo 24 17 EXPT Exponentiation 24 18 MOVE Assignment 25 1 SHL move to the left 25 2 SH
252. of the dialog box as shown in the figure Representation of the dialog box Specific Output Range 300001 300512 1 32 Dest Node Source Ref Length Bin BCD 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 300030 3 BIN v 21 22 23 24 v OK Cancel Help Result The values or registers 300030 to 300032 will be sent to node 20 Target Source in binary format 3 Close the dialog box with the command button OK 798 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples E 8 Compact Example Editing Local Drop Introduction This section describes the configuration of the first local drop When editing the first local drop the modules must be set with their I O references before the individual modules can be parameterized Note The communication module MVB258A is parameterized in the tool Train Communication Network A parameterization file binary file is generated and imported into the Concept parameter dialog Compact controller DTA200 DTA201 DTA202 C DIDIDIDIN ADD P VIUUHEEIAJAIUCHDIA U UJU 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 799 Configuration examples Defining Drops To define drops proceed as follows in the PLC Configuration window Step Action
253. oft Windows 98 Microsoft Windows 2000 and Microsoft Windows NT 4 x Note Additional up to date tips can be found in the Concept README file Title of Documentation Reference Number Concept Installation Instructions 840 USE 492 00 Concept IEC Block Library 840 USE 494 00 Concept EFB User Manual 840 USE 495 00 Concept LL984 Block Library 840 USE 496 00 We welcome your comments about this document You can reach us by e mail at TECHCOMM modicon com 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 IX About the book X 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Appendices At a Glance Overview Additional information that is not necessarily required for an understanding of the documentation What s in this The appendix contains the following chapters appendix Chapter Chaptername Page A Tables of PLC dependent Performance Attributes 639 B Windows interface 659 C List of symbols and short cut keys 679 D IEC conformity 707 E Configuration examples 733 F Convert Projects DFBs Macros 837 G Concept ModConnect 841 H Convertion of Modsoft Programs 849 Modsoft and 984 References 855 J Presettings when using Modbus Plus for startup 859 K Presettings when using Modbus for startup 873 L Startup when using Modbus with the EXECLoader 879 M Startup when using Modbus with DOS Loader 899 N Startup when using Modbus Plus with the EXECLoader 913 Sta
254. ogramming languages for Programmable Logic Controls PLC These include the two text languages IL Instruction List and ST Structured Text and the two graphical languages LD Ladder Diagram and FBD Function Block Diagram It also defines the elements of the sequential function chart SFC language for structuring the internal organization of PLC programs and Function Blocks Configuration elements used for installing PLC programs onto PLC systems are also defined Note Concept uses the English acronyms for the programming languages Furthermore it defines methods to enable communication between the PLC and other automated system components Concept In accordance with the standard the present version of the programming system standard Concept supports a subset of language elements which are defined in the standard accordance In this context accordance with the standard means the following e The standard allows the individual implementing an IEC program system to select or deselect certain language properties or even complete languages from the selection tables which represent an integrated part of the standard specifications A system which itself accords with the standard may only implement the selected properties exactly as they are given in the standard e In addition the standard enables the individual implementing to introduce defined language elements into an interactive programming environment As the
255. omma will automatically assign the data type REAL The state RAM is the memory space for all variables which are accessed via References Direct representation in the user program For example discrete inputs coils input registers and output registers are situated in the state RAM For every device with global inputs or specific inp outputs of Peer Cop data there is a status bit If a defined group of data has been successfully transferred within the timeout that has been set the corresponding status bit is set to 1 If this is not the case this bit is set to 0 and all the data belonging to this group is deleted to 0 SFC language element Situation in which the behavior of a program occurs regarding its inputs and outputs of those operations which are defined by the actions belonging to the step The step name is used to uniquely denote a step in a program organization unit The step name is generated automatically but it can be edited The step name must be unique within the entire program organization unit otherwise an error message will appear The automatically generated step name is always formed as follows S_n_m S step n section number current number m Number of the step in the section current number ST is a text language according to IEC 1131 in which operations e g invocations of Function blocks and Functions conditional execution of instructions repetitions of instructions etc are represented by inst
256. ommunication made via the COM interface with Windows depends on several factors These factors include the programming device clock speed the communication software and the other programs or applications that are used in the system Check list for Refer to the following check list if transfer problems occur transfer Step Action problems 1 Check that no other applications are running in the background Another application running in the background can mean that the active communication application in the foreground cannot receive information fast enough Check that the programming device is running at the highest possible clock speed Some programming devices can prolong the lifetime of the buffer battery with lower speeds Look in the documentation for you computer Use a serial connector with a 16550A Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter UART Windows uses the buffering capability of these connections so that Windows data transfer applications can reach higher speeds even on slower computers RTU transfer If sporadic errors occur during data transfer transfer cannot be carried out problems successfully with RTU mode If this is the case select ASCII mode See Quantum Compact Momentum Atrium first startup 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 877 Presetting for Modbus Plus 878 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Startup when using Modbus with the EXECLoader L Introduct
257. on Modbus by a non lit COM ACT display The COM ACT display is lit again once connection is made with Concept Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project p 43 908 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus with DOS Loader Momentum first startup for LL984 with DOS Loader Introduction This section describes the first startup of Momentum for LL984 when used with Modbus Note Loading the EXEC file for LL984 is not necessary with a new computer since it is preloaded in the the CPUs Flash RAM Loading the EXEC file for LL984 is only necessary if you have already loaded the EXEC file for IEC and now wish to change You should always check to see if a new EXEC version has been released in the meantime This information and the current EXEC file can be found on our website at www schneiderautomation com You can see the currently loaded version of the EXEC file in Concept using the Online Online controller menu command The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections e Start DOS Loader p 909 Define Modbus interface p 910 Protocol settings p 910 Select EXEC file p 910 Load EXEC file p 911 Start DOS Loader procedure for launching DOS Loaders is as follows Step Action 1 If the CPU display Run is lit stop the program with Concept in main menu Online Response The Run display is no longer lit the Ready is now lit 2 Open the directory D
258. on examples Dialog display Following the import of the INTERBUS configuration the dialog looks like this Drop m Module Output bits 206 Status table Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste No Module Detected In Ref InEnd Out Ref Out End Description A 1 BK 012 00 2 DIO 003 16 100001 100016 000001 000016 3 DIO 011 16 100017 100032 000017 000032 4 DI 130 16 100033 100048 5 AD 065 64 400100 400103 gt 000033 000048 TA BK 052 00 8 067 64 300100 300103 400104 400107 9 203 00 10 01 002 16 100049 100064 11 DO 001 16 000049 000064 12 DIO 003 16 100065 100080 000065 000080 13 14 T v 4 OK Cancel Help Poll 812 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples E 10 Momentum Example Remote I O Bus Introduction Overview This Chapter contains the step by step process for the configuration of a remote O bus Momentum What s in this This section contains the following topics section Topic Page General Information 814 Editing local drop 814 Example 10 Editing Remote Drops I O Bus 818 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 813 Configuration examples General Information Intro
259. oncept as follows chapter numbers refer to appendix B of 1131 3 e B 1 3 3 array_initialization array initial elements array initial elements initialized structure structure type name structure initialization e B 2 1 il operand list il operand EOL il operand il fb call CAL CALC CALCN fb name il operand list e B 2 2 il operator LD LDN ST STN S R AND ANDN OR ORN XOR XORN ADD SUB MUL DIV GT GE EQ NE LE PE JMP JMPC JMPCN 7 function_name 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 731 IEC conformity 732 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples At a Glance Overview This section contains various configuration examples given as step by step instructions What s in this This chapter contains the following Sections chapter Section Topic Page E 1 Quantum Example Remote Control with RIO 735 E 2 Quantum Example Remote control with RIO series 800 743 Quantum Example Remote Control with DIO 754 4 Quantum Example INTERBUS Control 763 E 5 Quantum Example SY MAX Controller 769 E 6 Quantum Example Profibus DP Controller 777 E 7 Quantum Example Peer Cop 791 E 8 Compact Example 799 E 9 A
260. ons IL is a text language according to IEC 1131 which is shown in operations i e conditional or unconditional invocations of Functions blocks and Functions conditional or unconditional jumps etc through instructions INT stands for the data type whole number integer Entries are made as integer literal base 2 literal basis 8 literal or base 16 literal The length of the data element is 16 bits The value range for variables of this datatype reaches from 2 exp 15 to 2 exp 15 1 Integer literals are used to input whole number values into the decimalsystem The values can have a preceding sign Single underscores _ between numbers are not significant Example 12 0 123 456 986 The new INTERBUS PCP I O drop type is entered into the Concept configurator to allow use of the INTERBUS PCP channel and the INTERBUS process data pre processing PDV This I O drop type is assigned the INTERBUS switching module 180 CRP 660 01 The 180 CRP 660 01 differs from the 180 CRP 660 00 only in the fact that it has a clearly larger I O range in the control state RAM The process through which an operation is carried out 972 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Glossary J Jump Element of the SFC language Jumps are used to skip zones in the sequence K Keywords Keywords are unique combinations of characters which are used as special syntactical components as defined in Appendix B of the IEC 1131 3 All
261. opened Select the signal conditions for the input and output channels from the list boxes and exit the dialog using OK Note Help with this can be obtained from the corresponding help text in the parameter dialog Response The parameter settings are automatically allocated to the addresses 400001 and 400002 Dialog display 170 AAI 030 00 Input selection Channel 1 Disable Channel 5 Disable v 10 V to 10V i Channel 2 4 5V and 20mA Channel 6 Disable v 1 5V and 4 20mA Channel 3 Disable v Channel 7 Disable v Channel 4 Disable v Channel 8 Disable v Parameter words Word 1 4444 Word 2 4444 OK Cancel Help Exit the dialog using OK Response You return automatically to the I O Map dialog Editing Remote To edit the remote drop open the RIO I O Bus Drop dialog This dialog is reached Drops I O bus via the I O Map dialog by pressing the Edit command button in the second drop I O bus 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 817 Configuration examples Example Editing Remote Drops I O Bus Introduction This section describes the configuration of the Momentum I O bus The drop has already been defined in Editing the First local Drop See Editing local drop p 814 When editing the I O bus th
262. ore than 100 copies of the source coding file The first backup file has the name backup00 c If you have made alterations to the Definitions file which do not cause any changes to the EFB interface the generation of a backup file can be stopped by editing the source coding file Objects Source If a backup file is created the source file can be entered as the name 962 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Glossary Base 16 literals Base 2 literals Base 8 literals Binary Connections Bitsequence BOOL Bridge BYTE Base 16 literals are used to input whole number values into the hexadecimalsystem The base must be denoted using the prefix 16 The values can not have any signs Single underscores _ between numbers are not significant Example 16 F_F or 16 FF decimal 255 16 E_0 or 16 E0 decimal 224 Base 2 literals are used to input whole number values into the dualsystem The base must be denoted using the prefix 2 The values can not have any signs Single underscores _ between numbers are not significant Example 241111 1111 or 2411111111 decimal 255 231110 0000 or 23111100000 decimal 224 Base 8 literals are used to input whole number values into the octosystem The base must be denoted using the prefix 8 The values can not have any signs Single underscores between numbers are not significant Example 843 77 or 8 377 decimal 255 8 34 0 or 8 340 decimal 224
263. out saving in the clipboard Ctrl V Replacing marked text with text from the clipboard Ctrl F Searching for text Ctrl R Replacing text Short Cut Keys in the FBD and SFC Editor At a Glance Concept supports the work with the keyboard in the graphic editors Although the mouse is a more appropriate input tool it is nevertheless possible to operate Concept with the keyboard alone especially in machine environments The editors behave in the same way regardless of whether they are operated with the mouse or with the keyboard Rules The following general rules need to be observed e The space bar corresponds to the left mouse button i e the space bar is used for selecting and moving e The enter key corresponds to the double click with the left mouse button for example the input key is used to call up the properties dialog of objects e The shift key is used in conjunction with the keyboard exactly as it is with the mouse for example the shift key is used to extend an object selection or to reselect a few objects from a number which have already been selected 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 695 List of symbols and short cut keys Calling up menu The table shows the short cut keys available in the FBD and SFC editor and the command corresponding menu entry commands see also General Short Cut
264. oves the gray field to the left margin End Moves the gray field to the right margin Shift End Moves the gray field to the right margin Ctrl Home Moves the gray field to the top left hand corner Ctrl End Moves the gray field to the top right hand corner 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 701 List of symbols and short cut keys Selecting objects Moving a selected object Allocating variables onto an FFB Selecting objects Key Function Space character Selects object in the middle of the gray field Ctrl Space character Selects object on the right hand side of the gray field Shift Space character Selects object on the left hand side of the gray field Enter In select mode Selects object in the middle of the gray field and opens its Select dialog if available Ctrl Enter In select mode Selects object from the right hand side of the gray field and opens its Select dialog if available Shift Enter In select mode Selects object from the left hand side of the gray field and opens its Select dialog if available Moving a selected object Key Function Shift Up Moves the selected object up by one field Shift Down Moves the selected object down by one field Shift Right Moves the selected object to the right by one field Shift Left Moves the selected object to the left by one field To allocate variables onto an FFB do the fo
265. oving Modules Removing Modules For removing modules proceed the following steps Step Action 1 For starting the application select ModConnect Tool in the Concept programm group Reaction Concept ModConnect displays its main window with a list of the installed modules Select the module you want to remove and select File Remove selected Module Reaction The Confirm lOModule Removal dialog is displayed Selecting OK causes the removal of the module from Concept Reaction The module is no longer listed in the main window of Concept ModConnect or in the I O Module Selection list box of Concept Note When removing modules If the module has been used in existing Concept projects the integrity of these projects will be compromised Select File Save Changes to save the changes data base Select File Exit for terminating Concept ModConnect Reaction The installed modules are now avaiable in the Concept I O map See Use of third party module in Concept p 847 846 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Concept ModConnect G 3 Use of third party module in Concept Use of Third Party Modules in Concept Precondition Insert module to I O Map The modules have to be installed according to the procedure Integrating new Modules p 845 To insert a module to the I O map proceed the following steps Step Action 1 S
266. ow A pull down menu is opened by left clicking on the title of the menu To go directly to a menu command drag the mouse pointer down the menu and then release the mouse button The menu can be closed by clicking on the title of the menu or anywhere outside of the menu Typical pull down menu Project Online Options Window Help Properties PLC Configuration Project Browser Execution sequence Variable declaration F8 ASCII reports Search F3 Trance SHIFT F3 Find Next F6 Search results F5 References used Analyze section ALT F9 Analyze program Options for code generation A main menu menu title and subsequently a menu command can be selected by holding down Alt and simultaneously entering the underlined letter in the menu title and then that of the menu command If for instance from the menu Project you want to execute the menu command Search press Alt P to open the menu and then Alt S to execute the menu command 666 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Windows interface Grayed out menu command Suspension points after the menu command Check mark Y before the menu command Shortcut keys The command is currently unavailable One or more other commands must be executed before the desired menu command can be executed On execution of this menu command a dialog box appears with options which must be selected before
267. p from the Drop column Select the Edit command button Response You reach the module map To map the modules and specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the Local Quantum Drop dialog Step Action 1 Select the Module column Response The I O Module Selection dialog is opened From the Category column select the all option Response All modules are listed in the Modules column In the Modules column select the CPS 214 00 module Exit the dialog with OK Response The module is inserted in the I O map Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example see Local Quantum Drop dialog representation In the In Ref and Out Ref columns set the start references for the input and output modules Note Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 e g 100001 Coil References have the prefix 0 e g 000001 Input Register References have the prefix 3 e g 300001 and Output Register References have the prefix 4 e g 400001 Response The end reference column In End or Out End of the available address range is automatically entered 746 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Dialog display Follow
268. page down Shift Picture down Scrolls the display sector one page down Ctrl Picture up Scrolls the display sector one page to the right Ctrl Picture down Scrolls the display sector one page to the right 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 703 List of symbols and short cut keys Creating objects Creating links Activating the different modes Creating objects Key Function Creates a N O in the gray field L Creates an opener in the gray field Creates a contract for the recognition of positive flanks in the gray field N Creates a contract for the recognition of negative flanks in the gray field Shift C Creates a coil in the gray field Shift L Creates a negated coil in the gray field Shift S Creates a coil set in the gray field Shift R Creates a reset coil in the gray field Shift P Creates a coil for the recognition of positive flanks in the gray field Shift N Creates a coil for the recognition of negative flanks in the gray field Shift F Opens FFB selection dialog F Creates current FFB in the gray field Creating links Key Function H Activates the link mode V Creates a vertical link in the right hand bottom corner of the gray field and then moves the gray field to the right by one field Shift V Creates a vertical link in the bottom left hand corner of the gray field Activating the different
269. patching of unexpected messages which prevents overlaps between various products on the same system e Complete functionality of TCP IP communication while protecting existing NETLIP NetBIOS MBXAPI standards For example Ethernet TCP IP communication requires a identifier address in the form of an IP address and a message contains an identifier index byte The Ethernet MBX driver protects this functionality e Working with TCP IP communication is an advantage for software developers not experienced with the complicated Winsock API e A single program model for software developers handles communication in Modbus Modbus Plus and Ethernet TCP IP networks e Increased compatibility with various products Winsock API is more oriented towards developer executed TCP IP strategies in a slightly different manner and can create compatibility problems in various products e Compatible with all MBX products How e g the Virtual MBX driver for use of old 16 bit DOS Windows applications and the MBX driver which dispatches messages between Ethernet Modbus Modbus Plus and remote MBX nodes Remote The Ethernet MBX driver includes the MBX Remote Server This enables remote connection nodes to access local MBX devices including Ethernet MBX devices via any Windows compatible network The remote client can be a Windows 98 2000 NT node with the remote MBX driver installed Also see Remote MBX Driver for Remote Operation p 868 Installation The
270. perties Links Advanced NetBIOS WINS Configuration DNS Configuration IP address This computer can automatically be assigned an IP address If IP addresses are not automatically assigned in the network get an address from your network administrator and enter it below Gateway Automatically assign IP address IP Address Subnet Mask OK Cancel Select the register IP Address and make the following settings Response The programming device is then registered for network operation with the IP address 824 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Computer The information is used to identify the computer in the network Identification in Win 98 NT Step Action 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel Network Response The Network dialog box is opened Select the register Identification Enter the computer name the name of the workgroup and a short description of the computer Dialog display Network Configuration Identification Access control Using the following information the computer is identified in the network Enter the computer name the name of the workgroup and a short pm description of the computer Computer name SG6191 Workgroup de acc Description Dell OptiPlex XL 5100
271. proceed the following steps fMosdson Step Action Programm 1 Open the Modsoft Converter Select File gt Convert Select the drive and the directory where to find the Modsoft env file The file will be found in the Modsoft program directory e g CAModsoft Programs Pick the file from the list Start the convertion with Convert Reaction The convertion is started Aconvert progress dialog is displayed after the validity checks on the env file are performed The first line of the dialog indicates the section currently being converted and the second line indicates progress as it pertains to the whole convert process e fany errors such as Out of memory Out of disk space or File access errors occur during the convert process an error dialog is displayed An operation completed error free results in the automatic display of the Save as Concept project dialog The default name of the project displayed in the Save project dialog is the env filename prompt 6 You can then change the project name and the directory in which Concept project will be saved Reaction If the project name selected already exists a confirmation dialog is displayed Note Saving the Modsoft converted program as a Concept project does not have to be done at this time you can still save using the File gt Save project as menu item 852 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Convertion of Modsoft Progr
272. r PLC resources Initialization of system inputs System zero no user definable start values Maximum number of variables per declaration Only limited by Windows or PLC resources Information for the determination of execution times of program organization units In preparation Methods of function display names or symbols Names Maximum number of function specifications not applicable Maximum number of inputs for 32 extendable functions Type conversion accuracy See EFB help Accuracy of functions of a variable INTEL floating point processor or emulator Arithmetic function implementation INTEL floating point processor or emulator Maximum number of Function Block specifications Only limited by Windows or PLC resources Maximum number of Function Block authorizations 512 per section number of sections per program organization unit is only limited by Windows or PLC resources Pvmin Pvmax of counters Limited by rangess of the INT or DINT data types Effect of a change in the value of a PT input during a time measurement operation Directly affects the timer s default time Program size limits Only limited by available PLC memory Time behavior and porting effects of the execution control elements The execution of SFC networks in different sections occurs sequentially in the order given in these sections Accuracy of elapsed step time 10 ms
273. r References have the prefix 3 e g 300001 and Output Register References have the prefix 4 e g 400001 Response The end reference column In End or Out End of the available address range is automatically entered 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 775 Configuration examples Dialog display Following module mapping and I O reference specification the dialog looks like this Local Quantum Drop Drop m Module Modules 4 ASCII Port No None Input bits 0 Params Input bits 32 Output bits 0 E Output bits 64 Status table Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste Rack Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description 1 CRM 931 RG REG RMT IF 2 RIM 101 361 100033 100048 16 IN AC DC 3 ROM 121 400005 400008 4 OUT ANLG SIM 116 100049 100064 16 IN SIM 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 v 4 OK Cancel Help Poll Set module To parameter the individual modules use the dialog RIO slot 7 SY MAX parameters l O St 2 and proceed as follows Step Action 1 In the Slot column select line 2 Response The 2 text box has a dark background i e the RIM 101 361 module has been selected for editing 2 Select the Params command button Response The 8030 RIM 10
274. r also unites applications that support the program interfaces MBXAPI and NETLIB Note A detailed description of the driver is included on the CD MBX Driver Suite ver4 20 in the Help file RMBX9X or RMBXNT Preconditions This connection is only made if your programming device is a node on the MBX Remote Server Also install one of these drivers because the MBX and Ethernet MBX drivers include the MBX Remote Server Installation The remote MBX driver software for Windows 98 2000 NT is included along with other drivers on the CD MBX Driver Suite ver4 20 The installation is carried out by Autorun when the CD is inserted or can be manually started CD drive SETUP EXE Select the driver to be installed from the main menu You will then be taken through the installation step by step The driver is then configured Configuration The configuration of the remote MBX driver is presently the same as the configuration of the other MBX drivers The remote MBX driver is operated as a remote client node which does not require a physical host interface adapter Therefore the driver configuration also includes the creation of logical devices MBX Remote Client which refer to the physical devices found on the server node 868 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Presettings for Modbus Plus Ethernet MBX Driver for Modbus Plus Function via TCP IP Introduction The installation can only be carried out in Windows NT When t
275. r help files settings in the INI file 957 Peer Cop 87 Quantum Configuration example 791 Peer Cop communication 50 Performance hardware 639 PLC family 639 PLC Simulating 613 Status 663 PLC Configuration 46 47 63 Export 597 Import 597 export 596 General information 66 icons 689 import 596 PLC family performance 639 PLC Memory 107 110 111 Atrium CPUs 155 Compact CPUs 139 Memory Optimization for Quantum CPU X13 0X and 424 02 114 Momentum CPUS 149 Optimize 107 111 PLC Independent Memory Optimization 111 Structure 107 memory optimization for Quantum CPU 434 12 and 534 14 128 optimize 110 PLC memory mapping 77 PLC selection 72 PLC state 531 543 Position FFB FBD 176 FFB LD 205 Precondition for unconditional configuration 72 Presettings for Modbus Startup 873 Presettings for Modbus Plus Startup 859 Presettings for ONLINE operation 521 Print settings in the INI file 955 Printing sections 605 Proceed in the following way with the configuration 67 Process Actions 241 Step properties 239 transition 246 Processing program 30 project 30 PROFIBUS specify coupling modules 86 Profibus DP controller 778 Quantum configuration example 777 Profibus DP export settings in SyCon example 7 778 Program Create 43 Status 663 Structure 29 processing 30 structure 30 Program creating ST 360 FBD 184 LD 213 Programming 6 Programming languages 9 xii Index
276. r in Windows 98 2000 NT 865 Virtual MBX Driver for 16 bit application capability with Windows 98 2000 NT 866 MBX Driver for connection between ModConnect Host interface adapters and 867 32 bit applications with Windows 98 2000 NT Remote MBX Driver for Remote Operation 868 Ethernet MBX Driver for Modbus Plus Function via TCP IP 869 Establishing the hardware connection 871 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 859 Presettings for Modbus Plus Installing the SA85 in Windows 98 2000 Hardware configuration Installing Drivers SA85 configuration Carry out the following steps to set the SA85 hardware settings Step Action 1 Set the Modbus node address Modbus Plus Port Address and the memory based address on the SA85 see documentation IBM Host Based Devices 2 Install the SA85 as described in the IBM Host Based Devices documentation Install the Virtual MBX driver and then the MBX or Remote MBX driver Also see e Virtual MBX Driver for 16 bit application capability with Windows 98 2000 NT p 866 e MBX Driver for connection between ModConnect Host interface adapters and 32 bit applications with Windows 98 2000 NT p 867 e Hemote MBX Driver for Remote Operation p 868 Carry out the following steps to configure the SA85 after installing the driver Step Action 1 Open the control panel Start Settings Control Panel 2 Select the Ha
277. r message during execution Mixed input data types in a selection function 2 Error message during programming Selector K outside MUX function range 4 Error message during execution Invalid character position not applicable Result exceeds maximum sequence length not applicable Numerical result exceeds the range for data 4 Error message during execution type Zero or more than one starting step in SFC 3 Error message during analysis loading network connection User program attempting to change step 2 Error message during programming situation or step time Simultaneously completed transitions without not applicable priority in a selection branch Side effects of evaluation of a transition 3 Error message during analysis loading condition connection Action control error 1 Error not reported Unsafe or unreachable SFCs 3 Error message during analysis loading connection Data type conflict in VAR ACCESS not applicable Tasks demanding too many processor 3 Error message during analysis loading resources connect Scan time overrun 4 Error message during execution Error cause Handling see note 1 Further task schedule conflicts not applicable 728 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 IEC conformity Note 1 Error cause Handling see Note 1 p 729 Numerical result exceeds the range for data type 4 Error message during execution Division by zero 4 Error message during execution Invalid data type for operation
278. rdware symbol Response The hardware wizard is called Select the Next command button Windows 98 Select the option Yes recommended Windows 2000 Select the option Add Troubleshoot a device Select the Next command button Response Hardware recognition is started 5 only Windows 98 Select the command button Next Response The status of the hardware recognition is displayed 6 only Windows 98 Select the command button Next Response All hardware types found are listed 7 Select the hardware type MBX Devices for Modicon Networks and press Next Response The database with driver information is installed 8 Select the adapter SA85 000 and press Next Response A memory area is automatically created 9 Select the Next command button Response The device no and polled mode 20 ms are automatically displayed 860 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Presettings for Modbus Plus Step Action 10 Select the Next command button Response The software for the new hardware component is installed 11 Select the Next command button Response You will be asked to shut down the computer 12 Click No Response The adapter is configured with the presettings Win 98 Edit To edit the SA85 configuration with Windows 98 carry out the following steps after SA85 the first configuration configuration Step Action 1 Open the control pan
279. re listed in the Modules column 3 In the Modules column select the CRA 93x 00 module Exit the dialog with OK Response The module is inserted in the I O map 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example see dialog representation RIO Slot 7 Quantum Drop 2 5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns set the start references for the input and output modules Note Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 e g 100001 Coil References have the prefix 0 e g 000001 Input Register References have the prefix 3 e g 300001 and Output Register References have the prefix 4 e g 400001 Response The end reference column In End or Out End of the available address range is automatically entered 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 741 Configuration examples Dialog display Following module mapping and I O reference specification the dialog looks like this RIO slot 7 Quantum Drop 2 Drop m Module Modules 5 ASCII Port No None w Input bits 0 Parame Input bits 176 Output bits 0 REY Output bits 96 Status table Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste Rack Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description 1 1 CRA 93x 00 RIO DROP S908 1 2 DDI
280. red in the textfeld Modbus Address Click the right mouse button in the left window Response A context menu with individual PLC commands is opened If the Run display is lit on the CPU stop the program using the command Stop PLC Response A message window appears where you can click OK to confirm Stopping the CPU Click the command button OK to confirm stopping the CPU Response You return to the dialog Modbus Target RTU mode and the green point disappears from the graph Activate the check box Bridge if the connection to the Modbus node should be made via a Modbus Plus network using a Modbus bridge Press the appropriate Option button for your system PLC Direct Device Local Head Remote I O Drop Click on the command button Next Response The Operation dialog is opened 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 881 Modbus with EXECLoader Select EXEC file Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to select the EXEC file Step Action 1 Press the Option button Transfer EXEC to Device 2 Click on the command button Browse Response The Concept directory is opened in a standard window 3 Double click on the DAT directory Response All available BIN files are displayed 4 Click on the BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired programming language See the table Loading Firmware for Quantum PLC Types p 950 Response The
281. rmation about the reference data editor 488 General to the variables editor 448 Generals Backplane Expander 92 Generals to Peer Cop 792 Generate Project symbol 671 Global data transfer 795 Global derived data type 471 Global DFB 394 Global DFBs defining the path 957 INI file 957 reading 958 storing 958 Global macro 429 H Hardware performance 639 Head setup 49 Help 673 Help files defining the path 957 How to use the Ethernet I O Scanner Ethernet Scanner 104 I O map 48 81 Icon bar 681 682 683 684 686 Icons 679 681 682 683 684 686 687 688 689 690 Identifier 244 IEC Momentum first startup 888 925 943 IEC conformity 707 IEC Hot Standby data 77 IEC section Animation 556 IL 261 Animation 315 318 Block call up 301 Code generation 312 Creating a program 319 Instruction 264 265 List of Symbols 687 Modifier 267 Online functionen 318 Online functions 314 315 Operands 266 Operators 269 276 Short Cut Keys 693 syntax check 311 Tag 272 IL command Comments 275 Compare 293 294 296 Declaration 273 call function block 302 Compare 291 292 295 DFB invocation 302 Function call 308 invert 285 Reset 280 Set 278 VAR END_VAR 273 IL operation addition 286 Boolean AND 281 Boolean exclusive OR 284 Boolean OR 282 call DFB 300 call function block 300 download 277 jump to label 297 multiplication 288 save 277 subtraction
282. rnet networks without having to make changes This also includes 32 bit Windows 98 2000 NT applications and 16 bit old DOS Windows applications Note A detailed description of the driver is included on the CD MBX Driver Suite ver4 20 in the Help file LMBX9X or LMBXNT The MBX driver operates either in Interrupt or Polled mode It supports the following ModConnect Host interface adapter e ISA e EISA e MCA e PC card PCMCIA The MBX driver includes the MBX Remote Server This enables remote nodes to access local MBX devices including the Host interface adapter via any Windows 98 2000 NT compatible network Also see Remote MBX Driver for Remote Operation p 868 The MBX driver software for Windows 98 2000 NT is included along with other drivers on the CD MBX Driver Suite ver4 20 The installation is carried out by Autorun when the CD is inserted or can be manually started CD drive SETUP EXE Select the driver to be installed from the main menu You will then be taken through the installation step by step The driver is then configured 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 867 Presettings for Modbus Plus Remote MBxX Driver for Remote Operation Introduction The installation of the remote MBX driver allows remote connection of applications operated on remote station client nodes Remote station access of the Modbus Plus network takes place using a standard LAN Local Area Network This drive
283. rruptions Modbus 3x flashes with interruptions CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows transter LED Response Ready lit Run not lit Modbus not lit Modbus 3x flashes with interruptions Note The three flash sequence Modbus display idicates that no communication is present on the bus This is displayed on Modbus by a non lit Modbus display The Modbus display is lit again once connection is made with Concept Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project p 43 software connection 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 883 Modbus with EXECLoader Compact first startup with EXECLoader Introduction Start EXECLoader Define Modbus interface This section describes the first startup of Compact when used with Modbus The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections e Start EXECLoader p 884 Define Modbus interface p 884 Protocol settings p 885 Select EXEC file p 886 Load EXEC file p 886 The procedure for launching EXECLoaders is as follows Step Action 1 Open the Concept start menu Response All installed Concept programs are displayed as symbols 2 Click on the symbol with the identifier EXECLoader Response The EXECLoader program is started 3 Click on the command Next as soon as you have read the information on the page Response The dialog Communication Protocol is op
284. rtup when using Modbus Plus with DOS Loader 933 P EXEC files 949 Q Settings in the CONCEPT INI 953 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 637 Appendices 638 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Tables of PLC dependent Performance Attributes A Introduction Overview The performance attributes of the different hardware platforms Quantum Compact Momentum and Atrium can be found in the following tables What s in this This chapter contains the following topics chapter Topic Page Performance of Quantum 640 Performance Attributes of Compact 645 Performance Attributes of Momentum 649 Performance Attributes of Atrium 653 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 639 Performance Performance of Quantum IEC and LL984 Availability of IEC and LL984 support Support CPU type Performance 11302 11303 21304 4240x 43412 53414 LL984 only x IEC only Stripped Exec x x x IEC and LL984 x x x x x X available not available 640 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Performance Special Availability of special performance attributes Attributes CPU type Performance 11302 11303 21304 4240x 43412 53414 LL984 Hot Standby x x x IEC Hot Standby x Interrupt processing with x x x x x HLI LL984 only Split memory LL984 only with separate software
285. ructions Structured Variables to which a Derived data type defined with STRUCT structure is allocated variables A structure is a collection of data elements with generally different data types elementary data types and or derived data types 980 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Glossary SY MAX In Quantum control devices Concept includes the providing of SY MAX I O modules for remote contolling by the Quantum PLC The SY MAX remote backplane has a remote I O adapter in slot 1 which communicates via a Modicon 5908 R I O System The SY MAX I O modules are executed for you for labelling and inclusion in the I O map of the Concept configuration Template file Concept EFB TIME Time literals Token Total IEC memory Traffic Cop Transition The template file is an ASCII file with layout information for the Concept FBD Editor and the parameters for code creation TIME stands for the data type time The entry is time literal The length of the data element is 32 bits The value range for variables of this data type extends from 0 to 2exp 32 1 The unit for the TIME data type is 1 ms Permissable units for times TIME are days D hours H minutes M seconds S and milliseconds MS or combinations of these The time must be marked with the prefix t T time or TIME The overflow of the unit with the highest value is permissible e g the entry T 25H15M is allowed Example t 14MS T
286. s Datatype editor 479 Derived datatype 479 Navigation LL984 368 Network Configuration TCP IP 823 Network link Modbus 522 Modbus Plus 523 TCP IP 530 NOT EQUAL 519 Objects SFC 220 insert LD 205 Offline functions in the configurator 69 Online 615 617 SFC 251 Online animation INI file 960 Online Control Panel 536 539 general information 533 Online diagnostics 558 Online functions 14 515 IL 318 General information 517 IL 314 315 ST 359 FBD 181 LD 210 SFC 252 255 Online functions in the configurator 69 Online help 673 ONLINE Operation Presettings 521 Online Restriction LL984 369 Online Search LL984 375 Open Project 671 Open Column LL984 372 Open Row LL984 372 Opener LD 192 Operands IL 266 ST 325 Operators IL 269 276 ST 329 ST 326 Optimize PLC Memory 107 111 PLC Memory Atrium CPUs 155 PLC Memory Compact CPUs 139 PLC Memory Momentum CPUs 149 PLC Memory Quantum CPU X13 0X and 424 02 114 PLC Independent Memory Optimization 111 PLC memory 110 PLC memory Quantum CPU 434 12 and 534 14 128 Optional Configuration 84 x Index P Page breaks for sections 605 Parallel branch 233 Parallel connection 234 Parameterize ASCII interface 88 Parameterize interfaces ASCII interface 88 Modbus interface 88 Parameterize Modbus interface 88 Password Protection 625 626 627 634 635 Path for global DFBs settings in the INI file 957 Path fo
287. s a program organization unit which correspondingly calculates the functionality values that were defined in the function block type description for the outputs and internal variable s if it is invoked as a certain instance All internal variable and output values for a certain function block instance remain from one function block invocation to the next Multiple invocations of the same function block instance with the same arguments input parameter values do not therefore necessarily supply the same output value s Each function block instance is displayed graphically using a rectangular block symbol The name of the function block type is stated in the top center of the rectangle The name of the function block instance is also stated at the top but outside of the rectangle It is automatically generated when creating an instance but depending on the user s requirements it can be altered by the user Inputs are displayed on the left side of the block and outputs are displayed on the right side The names of the formal input output parameters are shown inside the rectangle in the corresponding places The above description of the graphic display is especially applicable to the function invocation and to DFB invocations Differences are outlined in the corresponding definitions One or more sections which contain graphically displayed networks from Functions Function blocks and Connections A language element consisting of 1 the de
288. s column 3 In the Modules column select the CPS 214 00 module Exit the dialog with OK Response The module is inserted in the I O map 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example see Local Quantum Drop dialog representation 5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns set the start references for the input and output modules Note Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 e g 100001 Coil References have the prefix 0 e g 000001 Input Register References have the prefix 3 e g 300001 and Output Register References have the prefix 4 e g 400001 Response The end reference column In End or Out End of the available address range is automatically entered 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 767 Configuration examples Dialog display Following module mapping and I O reference specification the dialog looks like this Local Quantum Drop Drop Module Modules ASCII Port No None lw Input bits 4272 Parane Input bits 176 Output bits 0 91908 Output bits 96 Status table Previous Next Delete Delete Cut Copy Paste Rack Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End Description 1 1 CPS 214 00 DC SUMMABLE PS 2 1 2 CPU x13 0x CPU 1xMB 1 3 DDI 353 00 1000
289. s in the example Note The modules are sometimes set with different parameters Help with this can be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog To edit the remote drop with DIO you must return to the I O Map dialog and define the drop 758 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Editing Local Drop Introduction This section describes the configuration of the second remote drop The processing sequence begins first of all with the definition of the drop To edit the second remote drop the modules must be specified with their I O references before parameters for the individual modules can be set Note To link to the remote network the coupling module CRA 21x x0 must be entered during module mapping Quantum remote controller with DIO D 9 RIDDV V IO AlI 1 Local Quantum drop 1 DIO master module DIO slave module DIO drop 2 kr N 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 759 Configuration examples Defining the To define the drop go to the I O map dialog and proceed as follows Drop Step Action 1 From the Go to list box select the DIO 1 Slot 7 network link Response The drop entered in the table is no longer displayed Select the Insert command button Response
290. s interface interface Step Action 1 Select the programming cable interface on the PC default setting is COM 2 Select the Baudrate default is 9600 3 Select the parity default is EVEN 4 Select the Option button RTU 8 Bits for the RTU transfer mode Select the option ASCII 7 Bits for the ASCII transfer mode 5 Select the Stop bits default is 1 Note Data transfer can only take place if you have configured the same transfer mode ASCII or RTU on the CPU using a button on the front of the module 906 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus with DOS Loader Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus protocol Step Action 1 Enter in Enter PLC Address the node address set on the CPU using a rotary Switch on the back of the module Select the TARGET PATH 0 option Select the ACCEPT CHANGES option Response You return to the main menu Select EXEC file out the following steps to select the EXEC file Step Action 1 Select the option File Selection Response The File Selection window is opened Click on the BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired programming language See the table Loading Firmware for Momentum PLC Types p 951 Confirm your selection with RETURN Response You return to the main menu Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC fil
291. s pressed the Pos1 key moves the document window to the upper left hand corner of the section Ctrl End When the Ctrl key is pressed the End key moves the document window to the lower right hand corner of the section Picture up The picture up key scrolls the document window one screen page upwards while the cursor remains in the same position in the document window Picture down The picture down key scrolls the document window one screen page downwards while the cursor remains in the same position in the document window Ctrl Picture up When the Ctrl key is pressed the Picture up key scrolls the document window one page to the left while the cursor remains in the same place in the document window Ctrl Picture When the Ctrl key is pressed the Picture down key scrolls the down document window one page to the right while the cursor remains in the same place in the document window Edit Key Function Space bar In select mode the object at the cursor position is selected and all other objects are deselected In placing mode the corresponding object is placed where the cursor is Shift key Space bar In selection mode when the Shift key is pressed objects which have not previously been selected in the cursor position are selected or vice versa The selection of all other objects is not affected In placing mode the corresponding object is placed where the cursor is Space b
292. s the appropriate Option button for your system PLC Local Head Remote Drop Click on the command button Next Response The Operation dialog is opened 930 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus Plus with EXECLoader Select EXEC file out the following steps to select the EXEC file Step Action 1 Press the Option button Transfer EXEC to Device 2 Click on the command button Browse Response The Concept directory is opened in a standard window Double click on the DAT directory Response All available BIN files are displayed Click on the BIN file that corresponds to your CPU and the desired programming language See the table Loading Firmware for Momentum PLC Types p 951 Response The selected BIN file is displayed in File name text field Click on the command button Open Response You return to the dialog Operation and the path to the selected BIN file is displayed in the Filename text field Click on the command button Next Response The dialog File and Device Info is opened Information is provided here about the selected BIN file and also about the PLC Click on the command button Next Response The Summary dialog is opened This gives you an overview of the Settings made for you to check Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM Step Action 1 Click on
293. s viewer 558 Dialog boxes 668 Dialog interaction LL984 369 Direct addresses 34 Document section options 605 Documentation Contents 602 DFB 601 Keywords 608 Macro 601 Project 601 layout 603 DOS Loader Atrium first startup 940 Compact first startup 903 937 Momentum first startup 906 909 943 946 Quantum first startup 900 934 Startup when using Modbus 899 Startup when using Modbus Plus 933 Download changes 549 Driver for 16 bit application capability with Windows 98 2000 NT Virtual MBX Driver 866 Driver for connection between ModConnect Host interface adapters and 32 bit applications with Windows 98 2000 NT MBX Treiber 867 Driver for Modbus Plus Function via TCP IP Ethernet MBX Driver 869 Driver for Remote Operation Remote MBX Driver 868 DTY 465 467 468 DX Zoom LL984 374 Index E Edit Actions 241 LL984 368 371 SFC 236 Step properties 239 SFC 235 transition 246 Edit I O Map Backplane Expander 92 Editing local drop 736 744 755 765 770 806 814 833 Editing Networks LL984 373 Editing remote 800 drop 751 Editing remote drop 740 748 759 774 810 Editing remote drops 818 Editors 9 EFB archive 610 FBD 169 LD 196 Elementary Function FBD 169 LD 196 Elementary Function Block FBD 170 LD 197 Elements Data type editor 474 Derived Data Type 474 EN FBD 172 LD 200 ENO FBD 172 LD 200 EQUAL 519 Equation network LL984 378 379 Equation network Sy
294. s with an indicator which specifies whether it is an input or an output and whether it is a bit or a word References that begin with the code 6 represent registers in the extended memory of the state RAM Ox range Coils 1x range Discrete inputs 3x range Input registers 4x range Output registers 6x range Register in the extended memory Note The x which follows each initial reference type number represents a five figure storage location in the user data memory i e the reference 400201 signifies a 16 bit output or marker word at the address 201 in the State RAM 6x references are holding registers in the extended memory of the PLC They can only be used with LL984 user programs and only with a CPU 213 04 or CPU 424 02 Remote programming in the Modbus Plus network enables maximum performance when transferring data and dispenses of the need for connections Programming a remote network is simple Setting up a network does not require any additional ladder logic to be created All requirements for data transfer are fulfilled via corresponding entries in the Peer Cop Processor Remote I O indicates a physical location of the I O point controlling devices with regard to the CPU controlling them Remote inp outputs are connected to the controlling device via a twisted communication cable Remote Terminal Unit The RTU mode is used for communication between the PLC and an IBM compatible personal computer RTU works wi
295. selected BIN file is displayed in File name text field 5 Click on the command button Open Response You return to the dialog Operation and the path to the selected BIN file is displayed in the Filename text field 6 Click on the command button Next Response The dialog File and Device Info is opened Information is provided here about the selected BIN file and also about the PLC 7 Click on the command button Next Response The Summary dialog is opened This gives you an overview of the settings made for you to check Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM Step Action 1 Click on the command button Transfer Response A message box appears warning you that all data available on the PLC will be lost and the configuration and program must be reloaded on the PLC Click on the command button Yes to continue the transfer Response The Progress dialog is opened This gives information about the progress of the transfer in a progress bar and text Click Close once the transfer is complete Response The dialog is closed and you return to the dialog Summary Click on the command button Close to close the EXECLoader 882 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus with EXECLoader during transfer CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows LED Response Ready lit Run slow flashing Modbus lit with some inte
296. ssion Operator An operator is a symbol for an arithmetic or boolean operation which is to be carried out Output A parameter through which the result s of the evaluation of a FFB is are returned parameter outputs Output marker An output marker word can be used to save numerical data binary or decimal in words 4x the state RAM or to send data from the CPU to an output unit in the control system references Note The x which follows the initial reference type number represents a five figure storage location in the user data memory i e the reference 400201 signifies a 16 bit output or marker word at the address 201 in the State RAM P Peer Cop The Peer Cop processes the token execution and the data flow between the Modbus Plus network and the PLC user logic PLC Memory programmable controller Portrait Portrait means that the sides are larger than the width when printed Print out Expressions consist of operators and operands Program The uppermost program organization unit A program is closed on a single PLC download Program A function a function block or a Program This term can refer to either a type or an organization unit instance Program A redundancy system consists of two identically configured PLC machines which redundancy communicate with one another via redundancy processors In the case of a system Hot breakdown of the primary PLC the secondary PLC takes over the control check Standby Under
297. stallation of new modules the third party module manufacturer has to supply a disk which contains a specific MDC file and the help information Note The MDC file is dependent on the version of Concept so if you upgrade your Concept version make sure you get also an upgraded version of your previously used MDC files You will have to reinstall them 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 843 Concept ModConnect G 2 Integration of Third Party Modules At a Glance Introduction This chapter describes the procedures which have to be used in Concept ModConnect in order to integrate third party modules into Concept or to remove it What s in this This section contains the following topics section Topic Page Integrating new Modules 845 Removing Modules 846 844 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Concept ModConnect Integrating new Modules Precondition The specific MDC file for the new module has to be available Integrating new For integrating new modules proceed the following steps Modules Step Action 1 For starting the application select ModConnect Tool in the Concept programm group Reaction Concept ModConnect displays its main window If any Modules have been installed a lis of installed modules is shown 2 Copy the MDC file and the help file supplied with module to the Concept installation path 3 Select File Open Installation File Reaction
298. standard expressly emphasizes that the specification of such environments lies outside of its area of application the person implementing has a certain degree of freedom to offer optimized forms of display and implementation mechanisms for the benefit of the user e Concept uses these degrees of freedom e g when introducing the term Project to implement the IEC language elements Configuration Resource and Program all together Concept only supports one single cyclically running program within a single resource within the configuration Apart from this it uses them for example with implementation mechanisms made available for declaring variables and authorizing Function Blocks 710 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 IEC conformity IEC standards Information on which properties are supported and other implementation specific tables details can be found in the following statements on standard fulfilment and the associated standards tables IEC Conformity Test Testing the An interface for importing standard IEC programs and DFBs from ASCII files menu Import Export File Import and exporting these programs into graphical languages in ASCII Interface format menu File Export is available in Concept The conformity of this interface can be tested using files which can be obtained from IFAK Institut f r Automation und Kommunikation e V Magdeburg IEC conformity test scripts c 1994 IFAK Institut f r Autom
299. steps given in chapter Creating a Project p 43 software connection Note If you recieve an error message close Concept and start the BDRESET EXE file in the Concept directory to reset the SA85 Then start again from the first step 942 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus Plus with DOS Loader Momentum first startup for IEC with DOS Loader Introduction This section describes the first startup of Momentum for IEC when used with Modbus Plus The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections e Start DOS Loader p 943 Define SA85 adapter p 943 Protocol settings p 944 Select EXEC file p 944 Load EXEC file p 945 Start DOS Loader The procedure for launching DOS Loaders is as follows Step Action 1 If the CPU display Run is lit stop the program with Concept in main menu Online Response The Run display is no longer lit the Ready is now lit Open the directory DAT CONCEPT DAT Double click on the file LOADER EXE Response The installation program for the Executive file EXEC is started Select the option Communication Parameters Response The dialog box Communication setup is opened Select the Modbus Plusoption Response The Modbus Plus communication setup window is opened Define SA85 Carry out the following steps to define the LAN address set in the CONFIG SYS file adapter Step Action 1 Select the adapter
300. t Projects DFBs Macros 840 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Concept ModConnect G At a Glance Introduction What s in this chapter This chapter describes how to integrate third party modules into the Concept I O map and how to remove it This chapter contains the following Sections Section Topic Page G 1 Introduction 843 G 2 Integration of Third Party Modules 844 G 3 Use of third party module in Concept 847 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 841 Concept ModConnect 842 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Concept ModConnect G 1 Introduction Introduction Overview Information on hardware and I O modules is stored in the Concept System Information Database SysInfDb This database is maintained and updated by Schneider and included with every Concept release Nevertheless Concept is able to support new I O modules without having to wait for a new release That s where the ModConnect Tool comes in it takes a textual module description MDC and adds this information into the SysInfDb This means that supplier of a new I O module who wants this module to be available in Concept must also deliver an MDC file which describes the characteristics of this module Once installed the I O modules have the same functionality as existing Schneider Automation modules This includes the ability to set module parameters and to display an online help For the in
301. tart Concept 2 Open the configurator with Project Configurator 3 Open the I O map with I O map gt Edit 4 Open the I O Module Selection dialog by clicking on at the Module column Reaction The third party modules appear in the Other column 5 Select the module by clicking Reaction A short description appear at the top of the dialog You may press the Help on Module bution to display the module s help file supplied by the vendor 6 Click on OK or doubleclick on the module to insert the module the the I O map Reaction The I O Module Selection dialog is cloes and the selected module is inserted in the I O map 7 For entering the module s parameters if available select the Rack Slot column of the module and click on the Params button Reaction The parameter screen for the selected dialog is opened 8 Set the parameters for the module and confirm with OK Enter the input and output references for the module 10 Confirm the I O map with OK and save the project with File gt Save project 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 847 Concept ModConnect 848 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Convertion of Modsoft Programs H At a Glance Introduction This information provides you with the necessary process required to change previously generated Modsoft derived Ladder Logic programs into the Concept environment What s in this This chapter contains the following topics 2
302. tatus memory of EFBs Note Data which appears in the DFBs of this section is not section data The first digit the reference is separated from the five figure address that follows by a colon The SFC Language Elements enable a PLC program organization unit to be divided up into a number of Steps and Transitions which are connected using directional Links A number of actions belong to each step and transition conditions are attached to each transition With serial connections COM the information is transferred bit by bit The source code file is a normal C source file After executing the Library gt Create files menu command this file contains an EFB code frame in which you have to enter a specific code for the EFB selected To do this invoke the Objects gt Source menu command The five figure address comes directly after the first digit the reference 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 979 Glossary Standardized literals State RAM Status Bits Step Step name Structured text ST If you would like to manually determine a literal s data type this may be done using the following construction Data type name value of the literal Example INT 15 Data type integer value 15 BYTE 00001111 Data type byte value 00001111 REAL 23 0 Data type real value 23 0 To assign the data type REAL the value may also be specified in the following manner 23 0 Entering a c
303. th 8 data bits Errors which appear during program processing on the PLC in SFC objects e g Steps or FFBs These are for example value range overflows with figures or timing errors with steps 978 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Glossary SA85 module Scan Section Section Code Section Data Separator Format 4 00001 Sequence language SFC Serial Connections Source code file Concept EFB Standard Format 400001 The SA85 module is a Modbus Plus adapter for IBM AT or compatible computers A scan consists of reading the inputs processing the program logic and outputting the outputs A section can for example be used to describe the mode of functioning of a technological unit such as a motor A program or DFB consists of one or more sections Sections can be programmed with the IEC programming languages FBD and SFC Only one of the named programming languages may be used within a section at any one time Each section has its own document window in Concept For reasons of clarity it is however useful to divide a very large section into several small ones The scroll bar is used for scrolling within a section Section Code is the executable code of a section The size of the Section Code is mainly dependent upon the number of blocks in the section Section data is the local data in a section such as e g literals connections between blocks non connected block inputs and outputs internal s
304. th DOS Loader Load EXEC file CPU display during transfer CPU display after transfer Creating the Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM Step Action 1 Select the option Load File To PLC Response The Loading Process window is opened and the warning The PROGRAM contents of the device being loaded could be lost after loading a new Executive The CONTENTS stored in the Micro H H P will always be lost after loading a new Executive Would you like to continue Y N N is displayed 2 Acknowledge the warning with Y Response The message Node failed to enter normal mode appears 3 The DOWNLOAD PROGRESS window appears which shows the transfer rate Response After the transfer is complete the message Download Operation Successful appears 4 Confirm the message with RETURN Response You return to the main menu 5 Select the Exit Program option Response The DOS Loader is exited During transfer the CPU display is as follows LED Response Ready lit Run slow flashing Modbus not lit Modbus fast flashing After transfer the CPU display is as follows LED Response Ready lit Run not lit Modbus not lit Modbus fast flashing Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project p 43 software Note If you recieve an error message close Concept and start
305. the Number of Columns Fields Defining the contact connection to the power rail Setting Description ExtendedAut oConnect 0 Only the contacts from the first column in the LD editor are automatically connected to the power rail ExtendedAutoConnect 1 The contacts from the first and second columns in the LD editor are automatically connected to the power rail Defining the number of columns fields only available when editing with keys Setting Description AutowrapColumn 51 The section contains 51 columns fields by default It is possible to set from 2 to 51 columns fields When the last column field is reached the following objects are automatically placed in the next lines When this happens a link with the previous lines is established i e the objects are generated within a common rung Note Since with automatic line breaking the objects that follow are placed in the second column field it is recommended that you set the contact connection to the power rail as ExtendedAutoConnect 0 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 959 CONCEPT INI INI Settings for Online Animation Colors Line Width Defining the line width of connections in FBD and LD and for objects in LD Setting Description AnimationSize Setting the width of the lines The default setting is 1 It can be set from 1 to 10 960 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Gloss
306. the DFB editor Concept DFB EFB types are programmed in C and are prepared in a pre compiled form using libraries 966 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Glossary EN ENO Enable Error signal Error Evaluation If the value of EN is equal to 0 when the FFB is invoked the algorithms that are defined by the FFB will not be executed and all outputs keep their previous values The value of ENO is in this case automatically set to 0 If the value of EN is equal to 1 when the FFB is invoked the algorithms which are defined by the FFD will be executed After the error free execution of these algorithms the value of ENO is automatically set to 1 If an error occurs during the execution of these algorithms ENO is automatically set to 0 The output behavior of the FFB is independent of whether the FFBs are invoked without EN ENO or with EN 1 If the EN ENO display is switched on it is imperative that the EN input is switched on Otherwise the FFB is not executed The configuration of EN and ENO is switched on or off in the Block Properties dialog box The dialog box can be invoked with the Objects gt Properties menu command or by double clicking on the FFB If an error is recognized during the processing of a FFB or a step e g unauthorized input values or a time error an error message appears which can be seen using the Online Event Viewer menu command For FFBs the ENO output is now set to 0 The pro
307. the INI File 959 INI Settings for the LD Section 959 INI Settings for Online Animation Colors 960 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 953 CONCEPT INI General information on the Concept INI file Introduction Software settings can be specified in the Concept INI file Settings generated by the program are also stored in the INI file The INI file initially contains defaults that can subsequently be changed Where is the After the installation of Concept the CONCEPT INI file can be found in the Windows CONCEPT INI file directory situated Editing the INI Various settings are given exception path information and divided into several File keywords The lines that begin with a semicolon represent comments or explain the subsequent setting To edit the INI file only change the lines without semicolons or insert a new line after the comment in which to specify the path Then save the modified file Note Changes in the INI file are only accepted after Concept DFB Editor Converter is restarted 954 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 CONCEPT INI INI Print Settings Print Printing FBD Sections Printing LD Sections Defining default page break values for FBD sections Setting Description DX_FBD_PORTRAIT Specify portrait width default value at delivery 75 DY_FBD_PORTRAIT Specify portrait height default value at delivery 100 DX_FBD_LANDSC
308. the command button Transfer Response A message box appears warning you that all data available on the PLC will be lost and the configuration and program must be reloaded on the PLC Click on the command button Yes to continue the transfer Response The Progress dialog is opened This gives information about the progress of the transfer in a progress bar and text Click Close once the transfer is complete Response The dialog is closed and you return to the dialog Summary Click on the command button Close to close the EXECLoader 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 931 Modbus Plus with EXECLoader CPU display During transfer the CPU display is as follows during transfer LED Response Run slow flashing COM ACT not lit Modbus fast flashing CPU display after After transfer the CPU display is as follows transfer LED Response Run not lit COM ACT not lit Modbus fast flashing Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project p 43 software connection Note If you recieve an error message close Concept and start the BDRESET EXE file in the Concept directory to reset the SA85 Then start again from the first step 932 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Startup when using Modbus Plus with DOS Loader O Introduction Overview This chapter describes loading executive data EXEC onto t
309. the transfer is complete Response The dialog is closed and you return to the dialog Summary 4 Click on the command button Close to close the EXECLoader Creating the Carry out the steps given in chapter Creating a Project p 43 software connection Note If you recieve an error message close Concept and start the BDRESET EXE file in the Concept directory to reset the SA85 Then start again from the first step 924 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus Plus with EXECLoader Momentum first startup for IEC with EXECLoader Introduction This section describes the first startup of Momentum for IEC when used with Modbus Plus The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections e Start EXECLoader p 925 Define SA85 adapter p 925 Protocol settings p 926 Select EXEC file p 927 Load EXEC file p 927 Start The procedure for launching EXECLoaders is as follows EXECLoader Step Action 1 Open the Concept start menu Response All installed Concept programs are displayed as symbols 2 Click on the symbol with the identifier EXECLoader Response The EXECLoader program is started 3 Click on the command Next as soon as you have read the information on the page Response The dialog Communication Protocol is opened Define SA85 Carry out the following steps to define the LAN address set in the CONFIG SYS file adapter Step Action 1 Select the option button Modbus Plus
310. thernet specify coupling modules 86 Modbus Compact first startup 884 903 Momentum first startup 888 893 906 909 Quantum first startup 880 900 Startup with DOS Loader 899 Startup with the EXECLoader 879 Modbus communication 49 Modbus network link 522 Modbus Plus Atrium first startup 922 940 Compact first startup 918 937 Momentum first startup 925 929 943 946 Quantum first startup 914 934 Remote MBX Driver 868 Startup with DOS Loader 933 Startup with the EXECLoader 913 Virtual MBX Driver 866 Modbus Plus Bridge 528 Modbus Plus network link 523 Modbus Plus network node 87 Modbus Plus preferences installing the Modbus Plus driver in Windows 98 2000 NT 865 Modbus Plus Presettings Installing the SA85 860 863 Establishing the hardware connection 871 Startup 859 Modbus Presettings Interface settings in Windows 98 2000 874 Interface Settings in Windows NT 876 Transfer problems 877 Establishing the hardware connection 876 Startup 873 ModConnect 841 MODIFIED 519 Modifier IL 267 Modsoft Convertion 849 Function compatibility 858 References 855 Index Momentum Ethernet Bus System 833 Momentum remote controller with local drop 814 Momentum configuration example Ethernet bus system 821 remote I O bus 813 Momentum first startup DOS Loader 906 909 943 946 EXECLoader 888 893 925 929 Modbus 888 893 906 909 Modbus Plus 925 929 943 946 N Name
311. to the RIO slot 7 800 drop 3 dialog parameters and proceed as follows Step Action 1 From the Rack Slot column select the 1 1 line Response The 1 1 text box has a dark background i e the B810 module has been selected for editing 2 Select the Params command button Response The B810 dialog is opened 3 Select the option button Discrete Response You return to the I O map 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example Note The modules are sometimes set with different parameters Help with this can be obtained from the corresponding help texts in the parameter dialog 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 753 Configuration examples E 3 Quantum Example Remote Control with DIO Introduction Overview This Chapter contains the step by step process for the configuration of remote control with DIO Distributed I O What s in this This section contains the following topics section Topic Page Editing Local Drop 755 Editing Local Drop 759 754 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Editing Local Drop Introduction This section describes the configuration of the first local drop The processing sequence begins first of all with the definition of the drop When editing the first local drop the modules must be set with their I O references before parameters can be set forindividual modules Quantum remote controller with DIO
312. trium Example INTERBUS Controller 804 E 10 Momentum Example Remote I O Bus 813 E 11 Momentum Example Ethernet Bus System 821 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 733 Configuration examples 734 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples E 1 Quantum Example Remote Control with RIO Introduction Overview What s in this section This Chapter contains the step by step process for the configuration of remote control with RIO Remote I O This section contains the following topics Topic Page Editing local drop 736 Editing Remote Drop 740 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 735 Configuration examples Editing local drop Introduction This section describes the configuration of the first local drop The processing sequence begins first of all with the definition of all drops When editing the first local drop the modules must be set with their I O references before the individual modules can be parameterized Quantum remote controller with RIO 2 3 ouo lt Oc Local Quantum drop 1 RIO master module RIO slave module RIO drop 2 OD 736 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Configuration examples Defining Drops To define drops proceed as follows in the PLC Configuration window Step Action 1 Select PLC Selection
313. ule then appears in the I O Module Selection dialog and can be used in the I O map 5 Select I O Map Response The I O Map dialog is opened and the first drop is automatically entered in the table Dialog Representation Map Reserve for 444 4 Insert Delete Go To Local RIO slot v Cut Copy Insert Drop Tae Supervision in bits Outbits Status 1 Quantum I O 3 0 0 Edit insert at the end of the list select this line v Head setup OK Cancel Help 6 Select the drop from the Drop column Select the Edit command button Response You reach the module map 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 781 Configuration examples Mapping To map the modules and specify the address ranges proceed as follows in the Local Modules and Quantum Drop dialog Specifying I O Step Action References 1 Select the Module column Response The I O Module Selection dialog is opened 2 From the Category column select the all option Response All modules are listed in the Modules column 3 In the Modules column select the CPS 214 00 module Exit the dialog with OK Response The module is inserted in the I O map 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the modules in the example see Local Quantum Drop dialog representation 5 In the In Ref and Out Ref columns set the start references for the input and output modules Note Discrete Input References have the prefix 1 e g 100001 Co
314. um first startup with EXECLoader Introduction This section describes the first startup of Atrium when used with Modbus Plus The hardware requirements for loading EXEC files can be seen in the Modicon TSX Atrium manual The first startup is subdivided into 5 main sections e Start EXECLoader p 922 Define SA85 adapter p 922 Protocol settings p 923 Select EXEC file p 924 Load EXEC file p 924 Start The procedure for launching EXECLoaders is as follows EXECL r Step Action 1 Open the Concept start menu Response All installed Concept programs are displayed as symbols 2 Click on the symbol with the identifier EXECLoader Response The EXECLoader program is started 3 Click on the command Next as soon as you have read the information on the page Response The dialog Communication Protocol is opened Define SA85 Carry out the following steps to define the LAN address set in the CONFIG SYS file r adapte Step Action 1 Select the option button Modbus Plus 2 Click on the command button Next Response The Modbus Plus Target dialog is opened 3 Select from the list Devices Online the adapter address you set when installing the SA85 in the CONFIG SYS file Parameter n 922 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus Plus with EXECLoader Protocol settings Carry out the following steps to set the Modbus Plus protocol settings Step Action
315. uration and their allocated menu commands related topics General icon bar p 682 Icon Executed menu command PLC configuration PLC Type PLC configuration Memory Partitions PLC configuration ASCII Setup PLC configuration Loadables PLC configuration Config Extension PLC configuration Segment scheduler PLC configuration I O Map PLC configuration Data Access Protection PLC configuration Peer Cop PLC configuration Ethernet I O Scanner PLC configuration Hot Standby HSE Slo Be oo B e PLC configuration ASCII Port Settings PLC configuration Modbus Port Settings E PLC configuration Specials 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 689 List of symbols and short cut keys Toolbar in the RDE Editor Icons The table shows the icons also available in the RDE Editor and their allocated menu commands see also General icon bar p 682 Icon Executed menu command B Template New Template EB Template Open Template Ei Template Save Template ln b Online Animate Online Download Reference Data Online Get CSL BE Qx 01 ge Online Delete CSL 690 840 USE 493 02 May 2001 List of symbols and short cut keys C 2 Short cut keys At a Glance
316. utton Input in the area Specific 2 Enter the Destination register the length and the Bin BCD Code in the text field of the dialog box as shown in the figure Representation of the dialog box Specific Input Range 400001 401872 1 32 Source Dest Ref Length BinBCD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 400040 20 BIN v 11 12 v OK Cancel Help Result If node 10 has declared some specific output which gets delivered with every token cycle on the Modbus Plus network segment which is usually faster than the updating by the controller s user logic that gets sent to holding register 400040 And if it is more than one word it gets stored in the following holding register up to 400019 in this example The formatting can also be either binary or binary coded decimals 3 Close the dialog box with the command button OK 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 797 Configuration examples Specific Output For Specific Output proceed as follows Step Action 1 Open the dialog box Specific Output by clicking the command button Output in the area Specific 2 Enter the Destination Reference register the length and the Bin BCD Code option in the text field
317. ver for Modbus Plus Host interface adapter 2000 NT Remote MBX Windows 98 Driver for accessing remote nodes on the Modbus 2000 NT Plus and Ethernet network Ethernet MBX Windows NT Driver for Modbus Plus Emulation via TCP IP The virtual MBX driver software for Windows 98 2000 and Windows NT is included along with other drivers on the CD MBX Driver Suite ver4 20 Installation is done by Autorun when the CD is inserted or can be started manually CD drive SETUP EXE Select the driver to be installed from the main menu You will then be taken through the installation step by step The driver is then configured Note To guarantee a connection to Concept 16 Bit Application in the Virtual MBX Driver Configuration 16 bit Windows Applications dialog check the Support 16 bit Windows Applications checkbox 866 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Presettings for Modbus Plus MBX Driver for connection between ModConnect Host interface adapters and 32 bit applications with Windows 98 2000 NT Introduction Hardware support Remote connection Installation The installation of the MBX driver guarantees the connection between the MODConnect Host interface adapter and 32 bit applications with Windows 98 2000 NT This driver also supports the program interfaces MBXAPI and NETLIB This means that practically all Modbus Plus compatible software programs can be operated via Modbus Modbus Plus and Ethe
318. x x RIO Remote I O DIO Distributed I O z TIO Terminal I O x x x x SYMAX I O z 2 800 I O 2 4 LonWorks 5 A120 I O E available not available 650 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Performance Buses Availability of the buses CPU type Performance 70000 76000 76010 96020 960 30 700 10 78010 98020 980 30 780 00 Modbus with ring card x x x x x Modbus Plus with ring card x x x x x Ethernet TCP IP x 1984 x only Ethernet SY MAX E 3 Interbus x x x x x Interbus PCP loadable LL984 only Interbus PCP EFB IEC only LonWorks Echelon 2 g A MVB MultiVehicleBus x available not available Block Libraries Availability of the block libraries CPU type Perorman e 70000 76000 76010 96020 96030 700 10 78010 980 20 980 30 780 00 IEC only x x x ANA IO IEC only x x x COMM IEC only x CONT_CTL IEC only x x x DIAGNO IEC only x x x EXPERTS IEC only 3 x EXTENDED IEC only x x x FUZZY IEC only x x HANDTABLEAU IEC only x IEC IEC only X x LIB984 IEC only x x SYSTEM IEC only x x x 840 USE 493 00 September 20
319. x x x x Ethernet TCP IP x x x x x x Ethernet SY MAX x x x x x x Interbus x x x x x Interbus PCP loadable x x x x x x LL984 only Interbus PCP EFB IEC x x x only LonWorks Echelon using using using using using using NOA NOA NOA NOA611 NOA611 NOA611 611 xx 611 xx 611 xx xx and xx and xx and and and and LL984 LL984 LL984 LL984 LL984 LL984 MVB MultiVehicleBus x available not available 642 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Performance Block Libraries Availability of the block libraries CPU type Performance 11302 11303 21304 4240x 43412 53414 AKFEFB IEC only x X X x X x ANA_IO IEC only x X X x X x COMM IEC only x X X X X x CONT_CTL IEC only x x x X DIAGNO IEC only X X X X x x EXPERTS IEC only x x x x x x EXTENDED IEC only x x x x x FUZZY only x x x x x HANDTABLEAU IEC x x x x only IEC IEC only x X x x x LIB984 IEC only x x x Xx x SYSTEM IEC only X x x x LL984 LL984 only x x x x x x x available not available Utilities Availability of utilities CPU type 11302 11303 21304 4240 43412 53414 Concept DFB x x x x X Concept EFB x x x x x x Concept SIM x x x x x Concept PLCSIM32 x x x x x Concept security x x x x x x Concept EXECLoader x x x x x
320. your CPU and the desired programming language See the table Loading Firmware for Quantum PLC Types p 950 Response The selected BIN file is displayed in File name text field 5 Click on the command button Open Response You return to the dialog Operation and the path to the selected BIN file is displayed in the Filename text field 6 Click on the command button Next Response The dialog File and Device Info is opened Information is provided here about the selected BIN file and also about the PLC 7 Click on the command button Next Response The Summary dialog is opened This gives you an overview of the settings made for you to check Load EXEC file Carry out the following steps to load the EXEC file in the CPU flash RAM Step Action 1 Click on the command button Transfer Response A message box appears warning you that all data available on the PLC will be lost and the configuration and program must be reloaded on the PLC 2 Click on the command button Yes to continue the transfer Response The Progress dialog is opened This gives information about the progress of the transfer in a progress bar and text 3 Click Close once the transfer is complete Response The dialog is closed and you return to the dialog Summary 4 Click on the command button Close to close the EXECLoader 916 840 USE 493 00 September 2001 Modbus Plus with EXECLoader

User Manual Vol 3 - Guillevin Industrial Automation Group

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents